1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
159 by the \SpecialChar LyX
164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
166 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
167 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
168 Documentation mailing list:
169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
171 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Newline newline
191 \begin_inset Note Note
194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
195 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
196 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
202 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3364 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3366 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3384 manual for information on how to use it.
3387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3391 \begin_layout Standard
3392 Each class has a default set of options.
3393 Here's a quick table describing them:
3396 \begin_layout Standard
3397 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3405 \begin_inset Tabular
3406 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3407 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3866 \begin_layout Standard
3867 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3918 \begin_inset space ~
3922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3924 reference "subsec:Headings"
3931 \begin_layout Subsection
3933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3935 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3940 \begin_inset Index idx
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3962 \begin_layout Standard
3963 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3972 \begin_inset space ~
3980 \begin_inset space ~
3985 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3987 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3988 doesn't support special options you want to
3989 use for your document.
3990 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3991 -class and its options, you have to read
3995 \begin_layout Standard
3999 \begin_inset space ~
4006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset space ~
4017 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4018 You can choose between the following five options:
4021 \begin_layout Labeling
4022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4027 Use default page style of current class.
4030 \begin_layout Labeling
4031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4036 No page numbers or headings.
4039 \begin_layout Labeling
4040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_layout Labeling
4049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4055 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4056 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4057 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4060 \begin_layout Labeling
4061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4066 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4067 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4073 \begin_inset Index idx
4076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4078 -packages ! fancyhdr
4084 How they are defined is explained in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4100 \begin_inset space ~
4104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4106 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4113 \begin_layout Subsection
4114 Paper Size and Orientation
4115 \begin_inset Index idx
4118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 Document ! Paper size
4125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4127 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4134 \begin_layout Standard
4135 You can find the following options in the menu
4138 \begin_inset space ~
4145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4149 \begin_inset Index idx
4152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4161 \begin_layout Labeling
4162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4166 \begin_inset space ~
4171 What size paper to print on.
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4203 US letter, US legal, US executive
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Labeling
4220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4225 To choose whether to output as
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4241 \begin_inset space ~
4246 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4247 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4250 \begin_layout Subsection
4252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4254 name "subsec:Margins"
4259 \begin_inset Index idx
4262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 \begin_inset Index idx
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 Paper margins are set in the menu
4284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4301 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4302 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4303 the paper format and the font size into account.
4306 \begin_layout Subsection
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4311 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4317 That includes the paragraph environments.
4318 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4319 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4320 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4322 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4331 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4333 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4334 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4335 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4338 \begin_layout Section
4339 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4340 \begin_inset Index idx
4343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 Paragraph ! Indentation
4352 \begin_layout Subsection
4354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4356 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4365 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4368 \begin_layout Standard
4369 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4370 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4371 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4372 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4376 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4382 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4383 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4384 language than English.
4386 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4390 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4391 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4392 into \SpecialChar LyX
4394 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4397 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4399 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4400 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4401 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4408 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4409 goes to produce a printable file.
4414 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4416 gives you the ability globally to change
4420 these pre-coded spacings.
4421 We will explain more later.
4424 \begin_layout Subsection
4425 Paragraph Separation
4426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4428 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4433 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4437 Paragraph ! Separation
4445 \begin_layout Standard
4453 \begin_inset space ~
4461 \begin_inset space ~
4468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset Index idx
4475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4484 \begin_layout Subsection
4488 \begin_layout Standard
4489 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4494 \begin_inset space ~
4499 dialog and toggle the
4502 \begin_inset space ~
4507 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4510 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4514 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4515 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4519 \begin_layout Standard
4520 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4521 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4524 \begin_layout Subsection
4526 \begin_inset Index idx
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4538 \begin_layout Standard
4541 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4545 \begin_inset Index idx
4548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4561 \begin_inset space ~
4570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4571 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4577 \begin_inset Index idx
4580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4582 -packages ! setspace
4587 installed to use this feature.
4592 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4596 \begin_inset space ~
4601 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4602 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4605 \begin_layout Section
4606 Paragraph Environments
4607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4609 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4614 \begin_inset Index idx
4617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4618 Paragraph ! Environments
4624 \begin_inset Index idx
4627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4628 Paragraph environments|(
4636 \begin_layout Subsection
4640 \begin_layout Standard
4641 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4644 \begin_layout Standard
4653 } \SpecialChar ldots
4663 \begin_inset Newline newline
4666 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4669 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4670 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4679 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4682 \begin_layout Standard
4683 A paragraph environment is simply a
4684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4691 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4692 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4693 scheme, labels, and so on.
4694 Additionally, you can
4695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4702 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4703 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4704 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4705 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4707 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4709 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4712 \begin_layout Standard
4713 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4714 \begin_inset Graphics
4715 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4721 at the left end of the toolbar.
4723 will change the environment of the
4727 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4728 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4729 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4733 \begin_layout Standard
4742 create a new paragraph using the
4746 paragraph environment.
4748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4755 because if you are in one of these environments:
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4802 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4806 , rather than resetting it to
4811 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4812 \begin_inset space ~
4816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4818 reference "sec:Nesting"
4825 \begin_layout Subsection
4829 \begin_layout Standard
4830 The default paragraph environment is
4835 It creates a plain paragraph.
4837 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4838 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4839 this manual) are in the
4846 \begin_layout Standard
4847 You can nest a paragraph using the
4851 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4859 \begin_layout Subsection
4861 \begin_inset Index idx
4864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 \begin_layout Standard
4874 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4875 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4884 for thanks or contact information.
4885 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4886 places all of this on a separate page
4887 along with today's date.
4888 For other types of documents, the title
4889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4896 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4900 \begin_layout Standard
4902 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4916 Here's how you use them:
4919 \begin_layout Itemize
4920 Put the title of your document in the
4927 \begin_layout Itemize
4928 Put the author name in the
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4937 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4943 Note that using this environment is optional.
4944 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4945 will automatically insert today's date.
4946 If you don't want a date, use the option
4948 Suppress default date on front page
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 \begin_inset space ~
4963 \begin_layout Standard
4964 You can use footnotes to insert
4965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4972 or contact information.
4975 \begin_layout Subsection
4977 \begin_inset Index idx
4980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4989 name "subsec:Headings"
4996 \begin_layout Standard
4997 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4999 takes care of the numbering for you.
5002 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5004 \begin_inset Index idx
5007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5008 Section headings ! Numbered
5016 \begin_layout Standard
5017 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Standard
5065 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5066 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5067 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5071 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5072 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5073 You group the book into chapters.
5075 does a similar grouping:
5078 \begin_layout Itemize
5083 is divided into either
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Itemize
5142 \begin_layout Itemize
5154 \begin_layout Standard
5155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5163 Not all document types use the
5167 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5172 is the top-level heading.
5180 \begin_layout Standard
5185 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5186 labels it with its number,
5187 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5189 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5203 \begin_inset Index idx
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5215 \begin_layout Standard
5216 The unnumbered section headings have a
5217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5224 at the end of their name.
5225 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5226 the table of contents, see section
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5241 Changing the Numbering
5242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5244 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5251 \begin_layout Standard
5252 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5253 in the Table of Contents.
5254 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5256 Just as certain classes start with
5270 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5280 This is something you can change.
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5290 \begin_inset Index idx
5293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5302 \begin_inset space ~
5306 \begin_inset space ~
5311 you will see two counters.
5316 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5317 numbers a section heading.
5318 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5323 Short Titles of Headings
5324 \begin_inset Index idx
5327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5328 Section headings ! Short titles
5334 \begin_inset Argument 1
5337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5346 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5353 \begin_layout Standard
5354 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5355 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5356 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5357 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5362 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5363 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5364 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5365 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5370 \begin_inset space ~
5376 This will insert a box labeled
5377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5381 \begin_inset space ~
5385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5388 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5389 This also works for captions inside floats.
5390 There can only be one short title per title.
5393 \begin_layout Standard
5394 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5402 The following information applies to all section headings:
5405 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5409 \begin_layout Itemize
5410 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5413 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5417 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5421 \begin_layout Subsection
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5427 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5441 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5442 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5443 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5444 the text they contain.
5445 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5453 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5456 \begin_layout Standard
5457 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5466 when you start a new paragraph.
5467 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5471 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5472 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5473 have to change back to the
5477 environment yourself.
5480 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5489 \begin_inset Index idx
5492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5501 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5503 time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5516 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5525 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5528 \begin_layout Standard
5529 Here's an example of the
5542 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5544 See – no indentation!
5548 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5549 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5550 the other paragraph.
5553 \begin_layout Standard
5554 Here's another example, this time in the
5561 \begin_layout Quotation
5567 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5568 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5569 the first line, then
5573 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5577 you were quoting other text.
5580 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 Here's a new paragraph.
5582 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5583 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5586 \begin_layout Standard
5587 As the examples show,
5591 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5592 They should put quotes in the
5597 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5601 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset Index idx
5619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5635 \begin_layout Standard
5640 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5646 \begin_inset Newline newline
5649 Which I did not rehearse!
5653 It could be much worse.
5654 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5656 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5657 indented a bit more than the first.
5658 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5664 \begin_inset Newline newline
5667 And make things look fine
5668 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 arg "newline-insert newline"
5680 \begin_layout Standard
5685 does not indent both margins.
5686 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5687 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5690 arg "newline-insert newline"
5696 \begin_layout Subsection
5698 \begin_inset Index idx
5701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5729 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5730 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5739 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5740 lets you provide your own label.
5741 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5742 describing some general features of all four of them.
5745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5749 \begin_layout Standard
5750 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5752 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5753 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5762 reset the environment to
5766 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5767 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5768 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5776 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5783 \begin_layout Standard
5784 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5785 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5786 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5788 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5789 you read all of section
5790 \begin_inset space ~
5794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5796 reference "sec:Nesting"
5803 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_inset Index idx
5808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5824 \begin_layout Standard
5825 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5829 paragraph environment.
5830 It has the following properties:
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5838 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5843 \begin_layout Itemize
5844 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 The items can have any length.
5851 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5852 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5859 \begin_layout Itemize
5864 environment inside another
5868 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5872 \begin_layout Itemize
5873 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5876 \begin_layout Itemize
5878 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5881 \begin_layout Itemize
5883 \begin_inset space ~
5887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5889 reference "sec:Nesting"
5893 for a full explanation of nesting.
5897 \begin_layout Standard
5898 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5907 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5910 \begin_layout Standard
5911 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5912 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 The label for the first level
5920 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 The label for the second level is a dash.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5939 \begin_layout Itemize
5940 Back out to the third level.
5944 \begin_layout Itemize
5945 Back to the second level.
5949 \begin_layout Itemize
5950 Back to the outermost level.
5953 \begin_layout Standard
5954 These are the default labels for an
5959 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5964 dialog in the submenu
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5982 \begin_layout Standard
5983 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5984 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5986 \begin_inset space ~
5990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5992 reference "sec:Nesting"
5999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6001 \begin_inset Index idx
6004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Enumerate"
6020 \begin_layout Standard
6025 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6026 It has these properties:
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6030 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6034 \begin_layout Enumerate
6035 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6039 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6044 \begin_layout Enumerate
6049 environment resets the counter to one.
6052 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 \begin_layout Enumerate
6066 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6067 Items can have any length.
6070 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6074 \begin_layout Enumerate
6075 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6083 \begin_layout Standard
6092 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6094 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6095 labels the four different levels in an
6102 \begin_layout Enumerate
6103 The first level of an
6107 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6111 \begin_layout Enumerate
6112 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6125 \begin_layout Enumerate
6126 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Back to the third level
6136 \begin_layout Enumerate
6137 Back to the second level.
6141 \begin_layout Enumerate
6142 Back to the outermost level.
6145 \begin_layout Standard
6146 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6150 environment, see section
6151 \begin_inset space ~
6155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6157 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6162 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 There is more to nesting
6171 environments than we've stated here.
6172 You should read section
6173 \begin_inset space ~
6177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6179 reference "sec:Nesting"
6183 to learn more about nesting.
6186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6188 \begin_inset Index idx
6191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6205 list has no fixed label.
6206 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6215 of the first line as the label.
6219 \begin_layout Description
6220 Example: This is an example of the
6227 \begin_layout Standard
6229 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 it is meant that the first usage of the
6246 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6248 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6256 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 \begin_inset space ~
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6276 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6280 for more information.) Here is an example:
6283 \begin_layout Description
6285 \begin_inset space ~
6288 Example: This one shows how to use a
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6303 \begin_layout Description
6304 Usage: You should use the
6308 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6309 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6311 It's not a good idea to use a
6315 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6316 You're better off using
6328 paragraphs into them.
6331 \begin_layout Description
6332 Nesting: You can nest
6336 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6340 \begin_layout Standard
6341 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6342 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6343 them from the first line.
6346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6348 \begin_inset Index idx
6351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6360 \begin_layout Standard
6365 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6366 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6379 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6381 Here are its properties:
6384 \begin_layout Labeling
6385 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 \begin_inset space ~
6390 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6399 of each line as the item label.
6404 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6405 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6406 space as described above.
6409 \begin_layout Labeling
6410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6411 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6412 uses different margins for the item label and the
6413 body of the item text.
6414 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6415 label width plus a little extra space.
6419 \begin_layout Labeling
6420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6422 \begin_inset space ~
6425 width \SpecialChar LyX
6426 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6427 If the label width is larger, the label
6428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6435 into the first line.
6436 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6437 margin of the rest of the item text.
6440 \begin_layout Labeling
6441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6443 \begin_inset space ~
6446 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6451 environment has the same left margin.
6452 \begin_inset Newline newline
6455 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 dialog (toolbar button
6468 arg "layout-paragraph"
6475 \begin_inset space ~
6480 determines the default label width.
6481 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6490 multiple times instead.
6491 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6501 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6509 every time you alter a label in a
6514 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 The predefined default width is the length of
6518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6526 \begin_inset space ~
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6537 list the same way as the
6541 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6547 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6551 \begin_layout Standard
6556 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6557 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6559 \begin_inset space ~
6563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6565 reference "sec:Nesting"
6569 to learn about nesting.
6572 \begin_layout Standard
6573 There is yet another feature of the
6577 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6578 left-justifies the item labels by
6580 You can use additional
6584 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6585 justifies the item label.
6590 are documented in section
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6597 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6602 Here are some examples:
6605 \begin_layout Labeling
6606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6607 Left The default for
6614 \begin_layout Labeling
6615 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6616 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6623 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6626 \begin_layout Labeling
6627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6628 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6632 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6642 \begin_layout Subsection
6644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6646 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Standard
6664 The features described in this section require that the module
6666 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6668 is loaded in the document settings.
6669 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6680 -packages ! enumitem
6688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6689 Custom Enumerate Lists
6690 \begin_inset Index idx
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6702 \begin_layout Standard
6704 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6710 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6711 There you add the command
6714 \begin_layout Standard
6722 \begin_layout Standard
6734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6735 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6736 Code, look at section
6737 \begin_inset space ~
6741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6743 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6756 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6763 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6764 For capital Roman numerals replace
6776 in the command above.
6777 For Arabic numerals use
6785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6792 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6807 \begin_layout Standard
6809 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6817 You can only number 26
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6821 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6829 \begin_layout Standard
6830 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6831 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6834 \begin_layout Standard
6835 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6838 \begin_layout Enumerate
6839 \begin_inset Argument 1
6842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6868 \begin_layout Enumerate
6869 \begin_inset Argument 1
6872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6895 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_layout Enumerate
6901 \begin_inset Argument 1
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6928 \begin_layout Enumerate
6929 \begin_inset Argument 1
6932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6958 \begin_layout Standard
6959 For this list these commands were used:
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6973 \begin_inset Newline newline
6981 \begin_inset Newline newline
6989 \begin_inset Newline newline
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7006 makes the label emphasized and
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7025 lists until you change the definition.
7033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7035 \begin_inset Index idx
7038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7039 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 \begin_inset Argument 1
7055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7074 \begin_inset Note Note
7077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7078 goes back to default numbering
7086 \begin_layout Enumerate
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7094 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7099 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7104 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7105 to indicate that it is a resumed
7106 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7107 , but in the output.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7119 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7129 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7131 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7132 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7133 of a normal enumeration.
7134 There, insert the command
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7148 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7152 \begin_layout Enumerate
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7160 \begin_layout Standard
7161 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 \begin_inset Argument 1
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7184 This enumeration starts at 4
7187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7189 \begin_inset Index idx
7192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7204 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7207 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_layout Itemize
7212 with standard spacing
7215 \begin_layout Standard
7216 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7218 Add there the command
7222 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7225 \begin_layout Itemize
7226 \begin_inset Argument 1
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7248 \begin_layout Itemize
7252 \begin_layout Itemize
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7264 \begin_inset Index idx
7267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7269 -packages ! enumitem
7275 For more information see its documentation,
7276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7286 \begin_layout Standard
7287 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7289 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7290 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7294 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 \begin_inset Argument 1
7301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7309 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7322 \begin_layout Enumerate
7323 with negative indentation
7326 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7327 Further Customization
7328 \begin_inset Index idx
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 Lists ! Customization
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 You can also change the style of description lists.
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7352 changes the description label font, the command
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7362 sets the list style.
7365 \begin_layout Standard
7366 An example where the command
7369 \begin_layout Standard
7374 itshape, style=nextline
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Description
7383 \begin_inset space ~
7387 \begin_inset Argument 1
7390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7398 itshape, style=nextline
7408 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7409 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7413 \begin_layout Description
7415 \begin_inset space ~
7418 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7419 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7420 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7424 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7430 \begin_inset Index idx
7433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 -packages ! enumitem
7441 For more information see its documentation
7442 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7452 \begin_layout Subsection
7454 \begin_inset Index idx
7457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7468 \begin_inset space ~
7471 Address: An Overview
7474 \begin_layout Standard
7475 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7476 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7484 \begin_inset space ~
7490 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7491 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 gags on the document.
7493 In contrast, you can use the
7500 \begin_inset space ~
7505 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7506 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7511 Of course, you're not limited to using
7518 \begin_inset space ~
7527 \begin_inset space ~
7532 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7533 some European academic papers.
7536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7540 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7552 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7553 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7557 \begin_inset space ~
7562 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7563 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7564 Here's an example of each:
7567 \begin_layout Right Address
7569 \begin_inset Newline newline
7573 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 When is it? What is today?
7583 \begin_layout Standard
7587 \begin_inset space ~
7593 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7595 the largest block of text on a single line.
7596 Here's an example of the
7603 \begin_layout Address
7605 \begin_inset Newline newline
7608 Where do I send this
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7612 Your post office and country
7615 \begin_layout Standard
7616 As you can see, both
7623 \begin_inset space ~
7628 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7633 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7634 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7640 This makes sense, since
7648 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7649 Thus, you have to use
7656 arg "newline-insert newline"
7661 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 \begin_inset space ~
7668 \begin_inset space ~
7673 ) to start a new line in an
7680 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_layout Subsection
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7693 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7694 or list of references.
7696 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7701 \begin_inset Index idx
7704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7713 \begin_layout Standard
7718 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7719 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7720 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7721 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7735 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7736 The book document classes ignores the
7740 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7744 in a letter document class.
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7752 environment does several things for you.
7753 First, it puts the centered label
7754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7762 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7764 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7765 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7766 the subsequent text.
7767 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7769 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7774 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7778 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7779 The new paragraph will still be in the
7784 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7785 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 \begin_inset Float figure
7794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_inset Graphics
7797 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7810 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 \begin_layout Standard
7832 We would love to demonstrate the
7836 environment, but since this document is in the
7837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7844 class, we can't do this.
7845 We inserted it therefore as figure
7846 \begin_inset space ~
7850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7852 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7857 If you have never heard of an
7858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7865 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7882 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7889 \begin_layout Standard
7894 environment is used to list references.
7895 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7896 only use it at the end of the document.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 When you first open a
7913 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7914 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7930 depending on the document class.
7931 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7932 Each paragraph of the
7936 environment is a bibliography entry.
7941 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7942 Each new paragraph is still in the
7949 \begin_layout Standard
7950 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7951 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7953 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7955 handling, have a look at section
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7962 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7969 \begin_layout Subsection
7970 Special Environments
7973 \begin_layout Standard
7975 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7976 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7979 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7997 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8004 \begin_layout Standard
8010 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8012 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8017 key as a fixed whitespace.
8021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8039 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8057 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8060 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8063 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8081 So, when you finish using the
8086 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8087 Also, you can nest the
8092 environment inside of others.
8095 \begin_layout Standard
8096 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8103 arg "newline-insert newline"
8106 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8111 \begin_inset space \space{}
8121 arg "newline-insert newline"
8127 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 arg "newline-insert newline"
8141 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8147 \begin_layout Itemize
8148 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8149 You must put at least one
8153 in any line you want blank.
8154 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8158 \begin_layout Itemize
8159 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8163 since that will insert
8168 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8171 arg "self-insert \""
8177 \begin_layout Standard
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8189 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 printf("Hello World!
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8211 \begin_layout Standard
8212 This is just the standard
8213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8224 \begin_layout Standard
8230 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8232 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8233 as if you used a typewriter.
8234 \begin_inset Index idx
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8238 Paragraph environments|)
8243 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8246 Program Code Listings
8251 \begin_inset space ~
8259 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8263 \begin_inset Index idx
8266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8280 environment is similar to the
8285 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8286 computer console text.
8291 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8305 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8306 you can have empty lines.
8319 \begin_layout Itemize
8320 have a certain language and a text style
8323 \begin_layout Itemize
8324 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8325 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8326 and \SpecialChar TeX
8330 \begin_layout Standard
8331 Because of these properties
8335 works like a typewriter.
8339 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 \begin_layout Verbatim
8348 The following 2 lines are empty:
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8361 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8366 \begin_layout Standard
8371 environment is identical to
8375 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8376 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8383 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8388 \begin_layout Section
8389 Nesting Environments
8390 \begin_inset Index idx
8393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8394 Nesting ! Environments
8400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8409 \begin_layout Subsection
8413 \begin_layout Standard
8415 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8417 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8419 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8421 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8433 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8455 \begin_layout Standard
8456 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8457 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8459 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8461 \begin_inset space ~
8465 \begin_inset space ~
8473 \begin_inset space ~
8477 \begin_inset space ~
8482 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8484 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8487 arg "depth-increment"
8493 arg "depth-decrement"
8507 arg "depth-increment"
8513 arg "depth-decrement"
8517 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8518 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8522 \begin_layout Standard
8523 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8524 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8525 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8526 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8527 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8533 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8535 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8538 \begin_layout Subsection
8539 What You Can and Can't Nest
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8544 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8547 \begin_layout Standard
8548 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8549 than a simple yes or no.
8550 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8553 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 Completely unnestable
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8567 \begin_layout Standard
8568 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8569 environments have them:
8572 \begin_layout Description
8573 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8574 Can't nest into them.
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8609 \begin_layout Description
8611 \begin_inset space ~
8614 Nestable You can nest them.
8615 You can nest other things into them.
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8681 \begin_layout Description
8682 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8683 You can't nest anything into them.
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 \begin_inset space ~
8775 \begin_layout Itemize
8782 \begin_layout Standard
8783 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8791 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8801 \begin_inset space ~
8804 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8805 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8806 nested section headings violate this.
8814 \begin_layout Subsection
8815 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8816 \begin_inset Index idx
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8820 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8829 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8830 affected by nesting anyhow.
8834 \begin_layout Itemize
8838 \begin_layout Itemize
8842 \begin_layout Itemize
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8856 Figures and tables in
8860 are not affected by this.
8865 Have a look at section
8866 \begin_inset space ~
8870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8872 reference "sec:Floats"
8876 for more information about
8883 \begin_layout Standard
8885 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8886 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8890 \begin_layout Standard
8891 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8899 of its own, it behaves just like a
8900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8907 paragraph environment.
8908 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8913 Here's an example with a table:
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 This is (a) and it's nested.
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8933 \begin_layout Standard
8935 \begin_inset Tabular
8936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8937 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9023 \begin_layout Standard
9024 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9033 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9037 \begin_layout Enumerate
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9042 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9051 This is (a) and it's nested.
9055 \begin_layout Standard
9056 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9062 \begin_layout Standard
9064 \begin_inset Tabular
9065 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9066 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9153 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9159 \begin_layout Enumerate
9166 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9179 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9182 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 \begin_layout Enumerate
9191 This is (a) and it's nested.
9194 \begin_layout Standard
9195 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9201 \begin_layout Standard
9203 \begin_inset Tabular
9204 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9205 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9293 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9299 \begin_layout Enumerate
9301 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9308 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 \begin_layout Standard
9313 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9319 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9320 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9324 \begin_layout Subsection
9325 Usage and General Features
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9329 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9330 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9339 is the innermost possible depth.
9340 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9344 level #1 – outermost
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Enumerate
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Standard
9378 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9379 both of them in the example.
9380 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9390 For example, if we tried to nest another
9395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9402 , we would get errors.
9405 \begin_layout Subsection
9407 \begin_inset Index idx
9410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9419 \begin_layout Standard
9420 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9421 We have several examples of nested environments.
9422 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9427 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9430 \begin_layout Labeling
9431 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9441 \begin_layout Labeling
9442 \labelwidthstring MMM
9443 #2-a This is level #2.
9444 We created it by using
9447 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9453 arg "depth-increment"
9460 \begin_layout Labeling
9461 \labelwidthstring MMM
9462 #3-a This is level #3.
9463 This time, we just enter
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9474 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9478 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9484 arg "depth-increment"
9491 \begin_layout Standard
9496 environment, nested inside of
9497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9505 So, it's at level #4.
9506 We did this by entering
9509 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9515 arg "depth-increment"
9518 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9523 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9539 \begin_layout Standard
9544 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9547 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9553 \begin_layout Labeling
9554 \labelwidthstring MMM
9555 #4-a This is level #4.
9559 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9562 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9567 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9571 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9576 keep nesting things inside
9577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9588 \begin_layout Labeling
9589 \labelwidthstring MMM
9590 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9595 \begin_layout Labeling
9596 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9598 and this is level #6.
9599 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9603 \begin_layout Labeling
9604 \labelwidthstring MMM
9605 #5-b Back to level #5.
9609 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9615 arg "depth-decrement"
9622 \begin_layout Labeling
9623 \labelwidthstring MMM
9627 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9636 , we're back at level #4.
9640 \begin_layout Labeling
9641 \labelwidthstring MMM
9642 #3-b Back to level #3.
9643 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9647 \begin_layout Labeling
9648 \labelwidthstring MMM
9649 #2-b Back to level #2.
9654 \begin_layout Labeling
9655 \labelwidthstring MMM
9656 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9657 After this sentence, we will enter
9661 and change the paragraph environment back to
9668 \begin_layout Standard
9669 We could have also used the
9685 environment in place of the
9690 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9693 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9694 Example 2: Inheritance
9697 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9698 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9701 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9710 arg "depth-increment"
9714 \begin_inset Newline newline
9717 which, we will change to the
9725 \begin_layout Enumerate
9730 environment, at level #2.
9733 \begin_layout Enumerate
9734 Notice how the nested
9738 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9742 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9746 \begin_layout Standard
9747 We ended this example by entering
9752 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9756 and reset the nesting depth by using
9759 arg "depth-decrement"
9765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9766 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9775 \begin_inset Argument 1
9778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9779 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9787 \begin_layout Enumerate
9788 This is level #1, in an
9792 paragraph environment.
9793 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9797 \begin_layout Enumerate
9802 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9808 arg "depth-increment"
9812 Now, what happens if we nest an
9816 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9817 label be? An asterisk?
9821 \begin_layout Itemize
9831 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9832 So, its label is a bullet.
9833 (We got here by using
9836 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9842 arg "depth-increment"
9845 , then changing the environment to
9853 \begin_layout Itemize
9854 Here's level #4, produced using
9857 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9863 arg "depth-increment"
9867 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9880 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9884 , because we are in the
9892 environment (that is, it is an
9907 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9913 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9917 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9921 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9927 \begin_layout Enumerate
9931 arg "depth-decrement"
9934 to decrease the depth after the next
9937 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9944 \begin_layout Enumerate
9946 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9954 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9958 \begin_layout Enumerate
9959 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9968 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9973 reset the counter for the label.
9977 \begin_layout Enumerate
9981 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9987 arg "depth-decrement"
9990 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9991 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9992 into the twofold-nested
10000 \begin_layout Enumerate
10001 The same thing happens if we do another
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10010 arg "depth-decrement"
10013 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10016 \begin_layout Standard
10017 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10022 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10033 The number of other
10037 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10044 The same rule applies for the
10048 environment, as well.
10051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10052 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10055 \begin_layout Enumerate
10056 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10057 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10058 the same detail with how we did it.
10067 \begin_layout Standard
10075 arg "depth-increment"
10082 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10083 the example in parentheses someplace.
10084 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10085 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10086 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10090 \begin_layout Enumerate
10095 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10099 \begin_layout Verse
10100 Now we will add verse.
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10104 It will get much worse.
10105 \begin_inset Newline newline
10115 arg "depth-increment"
10125 \begin_layout Verse
10126 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10127 \begin_inset Newline newline
10130 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10131 \begin_inset Newline newline
10137 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10145 \begin_layout Verse
10146 Here comes a table:
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10157 \begin_layout Standard
10159 \begin_inset Tabular
10160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10161 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10248 \begin_layout Verse
10252 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10262 arg "depth-increment"
10268 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10274 \begin_inset Newline newline
10282 arg "depth-decrement"
10289 \begin_layout Enumerate
10294 : level #1) This is another item.
10295 Note that selecting a
10299 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10300 3 times to put the table inside the
10308 \begin_layout Quotation
10309 We're now ending the
10313 list and changing to
10318 We're still at level #1.
10319 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10320 The next set of paragraphs is a
10321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10328 We will nest both the
10335 \begin_inset space ~
10340 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10344 for the letter body.
10348 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10351 to preserve the depth.
10352 Remember that you need to use
10355 arg "newline-insert newline"
10358 to create multiple lines inside the
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10375 \begin_layout Right Address
10377 \begin_inset Newline newline
10380 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10381 \begin_inset Newline newline
10387 \begin_layout Address
10389 \begin_inset space ~
10395 \begin_layout Quotation
10396 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10400 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10401 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10402 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10403 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10404 as soon as possible.
10405 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10410 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10411 with your order, along with payment.
10414 \begin_layout Quotation
10415 We thank you again for your patience.
10418 \begin_layout Address
10420 \begin_inset Newline newline
10427 \begin_layout Quotation
10428 That ends that example!
10431 \begin_layout Standard
10432 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10433 gives you a lot of power with just
10435 We could have easily nested an
10456 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10459 \begin_layout Subsection
10461 \begin_inset Index idx
10464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10465 Nesting ! Separation
10471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10473 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10480 \begin_layout Standard
10481 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10483 For example you need two different enumerations:
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10496 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 \begin_layout Standard
10501 \begin_inset Separator plain
10507 \begin_layout Itemize
10513 \begin_layout Standard
10514 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10520 \begin_layout Enumerate
10524 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 \begin_layout Enumerate
10532 \begin_layout Standard
10533 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10534 list item and use the menu
10536 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10537 Start New Environment
10540 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10541 ) and behind it the new list.
10544 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10545 Start New Parent Environment
10547 only appears if the item is nested.
10548 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10552 \begin_layout Standard
10553 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10554 (red arrow in LyX).
10555 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10556 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10559 \begin_layout Standard
10560 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10563 arg "paragraph-break"
10570 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10573 \begin_layout Section
10574 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10575 \begin_inset Index idx
10578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10587 \begin_layout Standard
10588 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10589 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10591 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10592 be broken at the end of a line.
10593 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10597 \begin_layout Subsection
10599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10601 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10606 \begin_inset Index idx
10609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10618 \begin_layout Standard
10619 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10620 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10621 ) not to break the line at
10623 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10626 \begin_layout Quote
10627 Further documentation is given in section
10628 \begin_inset Newline newline
10632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10634 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10642 \begin_layout Standard
10643 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10658 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10667 A protected space is set with
10669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10670 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10672 \begin_inset space ~
10680 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10686 \begin_layout Subsection
10688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10690 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10695 \begin_inset Index idx
10698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10699 Spacing ! Horizontal
10707 \begin_layout Standard
10708 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10711 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10715 The length units are listed in Appendix
10716 \begin_inset space ~
10720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10722 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10733 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10738 \begin_inset Index idx
10741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10742 Spaces ! Inter-word
10750 \begin_layout Standard
10751 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10752 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10753 at the ends of sentences.
10754 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10755 automatically takes care about this.
10756 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10757 followed by a period; see section
10758 \begin_inset space ~
10762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10764 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10769 To insert a normal space, select
10771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10774 \begin_inset space ~
10782 arg "space-insert normal"
10788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10792 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10797 \begin_inset Index idx
10800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10809 \begin_layout Standard
10811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10818 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10827 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10828 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10829 inside abbreviations:
10832 \begin_layout Quote
10834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10838 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 or between values and units.
10843 Compare for example this:
10844 \begin_inset Newline newline
10848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10852 \begin_inset Newline newline
10855 10 kg (normal space
10858 \begin_layout Standard
10859 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10861 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10864 \begin_inset space ~
10872 arg "space-insert thin"
10878 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10882 \begin_layout Standard
10883 You can also insert the following space types:
10886 \begin_layout Description
10888 \begin_inset space ~
10892 \begin_inset space ~
10895 space A line with a
10896 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10900 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10904 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10907 negative thin space between the arrows.
10910 \begin_layout Description
10912 \begin_inset space ~
10916 \begin_inset space ~
10919 space A line with a
10920 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10924 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10928 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10931 negative medium space between the arrows.
10934 \begin_layout Description
10936 \begin_inset space ~
10940 \begin_inset space ~
10943 space A line with a
10944 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10948 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10952 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10955 negative thick space between the arrows.
10958 \begin_layout Description
10960 \begin_inset space ~
10964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10968 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10972 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10976 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10980 \begin_inset space ~
10984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10987 em) space between the arrows.
10990 \begin_layout Description
10992 \begin_inset space ~
10996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11000 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11004 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11008 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11012 \begin_inset space ~
11016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11019 em) space between the arrows.
11022 \begin_layout Description
11024 \begin_inset space ~
11028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11032 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11036 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11040 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11044 \begin_inset space ~
11048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11051 em) space between the arrows.
11054 \begin_layout Description
11056 \begin_inset space ~
11060 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11064 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11069 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11076 cm space between the arrows.
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11081 \begin_inset space ~
11085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11087 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11091 lists the different space sizes.
11094 \begin_layout Standard
11095 \begin_inset Float table
11100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11101 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11106 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11110 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 \begin_inset Tabular
11121 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11122 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11240 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11399 \begin_inset Index idx
11402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11411 \begin_layout Standard
11412 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11413 feature for adding extra space
11414 in a uniform fashion.
11415 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11416 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11417 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11418 equally between themselves.
11421 \begin_layout Standard
11422 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11425 \begin_layout Quote
11427 This is on the left side
11428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11431 This is on the right
11434 \begin_layout Quote
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11447 \begin_layout Quote
11450 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11464 \begin_layout Standard
11465 That was an example in the
11471 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11475 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11479 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11482 is one in a standard paragraph.
11483 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11487 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11490 \begin_layout Standard
11491 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11494 \begin_inset space ~
11499 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11502 \begin_layout Standard
11504 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11508 \begin_inset space ~
11514 \begin_layout Standard
11516 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11520 \begin_inset space ~
11526 \begin_layout Standard
11528 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11532 \begin_inset space ~
11538 \begin_layout Standard
11540 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11544 \begin_inset space ~
11550 \begin_layout Standard
11552 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11556 \begin_inset space ~
11562 \begin_layout Standard
11564 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11568 \begin_inset space ~
11574 \begin_layout Standard
11575 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11583 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11587 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11589 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11590 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11594 option in the space dialog.
11602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11606 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11611 \begin_inset Index idx
11614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11625 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11628 \begin_layout Standard
11629 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11632 What is correct English?:
11633 \begin_inset Newline newline
11637 \begin_inset Newline newline
11641 \begin_inset space ~
11644 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11645 \begin_inset Newline newline
11649 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11660 \begin_inset Newline newline
11664 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11675 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11681 \begin_layout Standard
11683 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11688 \begin_inset space ~
11692 \begin_inset space ~
11696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11700 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11702 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11703 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11707 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11713 \begin_inset space ~
11717 \begin_inset space ~
11721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11724 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11733 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11734 That is why it is named
11735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11743 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11744 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11748 \begin_layout Subsection
11750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11752 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11757 \begin_inset Index idx
11760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11769 \begin_layout Standard
11770 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11773 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11775 \begin_inset space ~
11781 There you find the following sizes:
11784 \begin_layout Standard
11797 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11798 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11803 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11805 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11806 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11808 \begin_inset space ~
11814 \begin_inset Index idx
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11818 Document ! Settings
11823 for the paragraph separation.
11824 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11835 \begin_layout Standard
11841 \begin_inset Index idx
11844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11850 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11851 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11856 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11857 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11866 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11875 s are described in section
11876 \begin_inset space ~
11880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11882 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11891 If there are several
11895 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11896 You can therefore use
11900 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11903 \begin_layout Standard
11908 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11909 \begin_inset space ~
11913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11915 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11922 \begin_layout Standard
11923 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11933 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11934 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11946 \begin_layout Subsection
11947 Paragraph Alignment
11948 \begin_inset Index idx
11951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11952 Paragraph ! Alignment
11960 \begin_layout Standard
11961 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11963 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11966 dialog (toolbar button
11969 arg "layout-paragraph"
11973 There are five possibilities:
11976 \begin_layout Itemize
11984 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11990 \begin_layout Itemize
11998 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12004 \begin_layout Itemize
12012 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12018 \begin_layout Itemize
12026 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12032 \begin_layout Itemize
12040 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12046 \begin_layout Standard
12047 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12048 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12049 the left and right margins.
12050 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 This paragraph is right aligned,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is centered,
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12065 this one is left aligned.
12068 \begin_layout Subsection
12070 \begin_inset Index idx
12073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12074 Page breaks ! Forced
12080 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12082 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12089 \begin_layout Standard
12090 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12091 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12092 force a page break where you want one.
12093 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12094 is good at page breaking.
12095 Only if you use a lot of
12099 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12103 \begin_layout Standard
12104 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12105 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12109 have to change the page breaking.
12112 \begin_layout Standard
12113 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12115 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12118 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12120 \begin_inset space ~
12126 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12129 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12131 \begin_inset space ~
12136 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12138 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12139 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12142 \begin_layout Standard
12143 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12144 at the top of a page.
12145 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12147 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12148 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12149 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12153 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12157 to learn more about
12164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12168 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12173 \begin_inset Index idx
12176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12177 Page breaks ! Clear
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12186 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12187 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12188 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12189 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12190 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12193 \begin_layout Standard
12194 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12197 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12199 \begin_inset space ~
12205 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12208 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12210 \begin_inset space ~
12214 \begin_inset space ~
12219 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12220 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12223 \begin_layout Subsection
12225 \begin_inset Index idx
12228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12235 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12237 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12244 \begin_layout Standard
12245 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12247 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12264 arg "newline-insert newline"
12268 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12271 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12273 \begin_inset space ~
12277 \begin_inset space ~
12285 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12288 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12290 This is useful to avoid
12291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12298 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12301 \begin_layout Standard
12302 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12303 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12305 very good at line breaking.
12306 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12307 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12308 \begin_inset space ~
12312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12314 reference "sec:Quote"
12319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12321 reference "sec:Verse"
12326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12328 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12335 \begin_layout Subsection
12337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12339 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12344 \begin_inset Index idx
12347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12356 \begin_layout Standard
12358 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12369 \begin_layout Standard
12373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12374 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12376 \begin_inset space ~
12381 you can insert horizontal lines.
12382 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12383 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12384 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12387 \begin_layout Standard
12389 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12400 \begin_layout Section
12401 Characters and Symbols
12404 \begin_layout Standard
12405 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12406 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12407 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12415 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12419 for information on how this is done.
12422 \begin_layout Standard
12423 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12428 dialog via the menu
12430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12431 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12437 \begin_layout Standard
12438 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12446 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12447 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12449 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12457 \begin_layout Section
12458 Fonts and Text Styles
12459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12461 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12468 \begin_layout Subsection
12470 \begin_inset Index idx
12473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12482 \begin_layout Standard
12483 There are two types of fonts:
12486 \begin_layout Description
12488 \begin_inset space ~
12492 \begin_inset Index idx
12495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12501 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12506 characters) in the font.
12507 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12508 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12509 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12510 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12511 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12512 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12513 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12514 \begin_inset Newline newline
12517 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12518 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12519 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12520 sizes than at small ones.
12521 \begin_inset Newline newline
12535 \begin_inset space ~
12543 \begin_layout Description
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12549 \begin_inset Index idx
12552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12558 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12559 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12560 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12561 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12562 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12563 image manipulation program.
12564 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12565 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12569 pixels high up to 34
12570 \begin_inset space ~
12573 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12574 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12575 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12577 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12578 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12579 \begin_inset Newline newline
12582 Bitmap fonts are named
12585 \begin_inset space ~
12590 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12593 \begin_layout Standard
12594 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12595 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12596 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12597 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12598 use scalable fonts.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12605 \begin_layout Standard
12606 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12607 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12608 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12609 font to emphasize text, you use an
12610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12618 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12620 In \SpecialChar LyX
12621 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12625 \begin_layout Subsection
12628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12630 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12637 \begin_layout Standard
12638 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 used its own fonts.
12640 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12641 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12646 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12647 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12648 to a word processor.
12649 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12650 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 files are very portable across
12652 different machines.
12653 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12654 has increased a lot
12655 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12658 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12666 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12671 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12672 code in the document
12673 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12676 \begin_layout Standard
12677 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12678 engines that are also able directly
12679 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12681 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12683 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12685 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12686 that is installed on your system.
12687 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12690 \begin_layout Standard
12691 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12699 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12700 es; so you might have to experiment.
12708 \begin_layout Subsection
12709 Document Font and Font size
12710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12712 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12717 \begin_inset Index idx
12720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12727 \begin_inset Index idx
12730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 \begin_layout Standard
12740 You can set the document fonts in the
12742 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12746 \begin_inset Index idx
12749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12750 Document ! Settings
12760 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12761 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12764 \begin_inset space ~
12773 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12775 \begin_inset space ~
12778 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12781 \begin_layout Standard
12786 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12787 This requires that you use
12799 as the output format, i.
12800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12804 \begin_inset space \space{}
12807 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12808 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12809 installed (see section
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12816 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12821 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12823 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12824 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12826 \begin_inset space ~
12829 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12830 cannot determine the family.
12831 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12832 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12835 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12838 \begin_layout Standard
12839 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12840 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12845 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12851 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12852 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12860 \begin_inset space ~
12866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12879 European Computer Modern
12882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12889 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12892 \begin_layout Standard
12901 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12902 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12907 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12915 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12921 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12922 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12925 \begin_layout Itemize
12929 \begin_inset space ~
12934 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12947 \begin_inset space ~
12952 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12953 community in order to replace
12957 as the default font.
12958 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12959 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12962 \begin_inset space ~
12975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12976 One difference is improved kerning.
12984 \begin_layout Itemize
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12992 \begin_inset space ~
12997 fonts in (the rare) case that
13000 \begin_inset space ~
13005 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13020 Virtual means that it
13021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13032 -glyphs from other fonts.
13033 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13055 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13061 \begin_inset Index idx
13064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13066 -packages ! aeguill
13071 with the document preamble line
13072 \begin_inset Newline newline
13079 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13080 \begin_inset Newline newline
13085 will fix the guillemet problem.
13090 and that accented characters are not
13094 glyph, but built of
13098 characters, the accent and the letter.
13099 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13105 If you search for example for the French word
13106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13113 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13122 and not for the glyph
13123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13127 \begin_inset space ~
13131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13137 \begin_layout Itemize
13138 If you do not like the look of
13146 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13157 \begin_inset space ~
13167 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13168 \begin_inset space ~
13171 serif and typewriter fonts,
13175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13176 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13183 \begin_inset space ~
13192 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13197 \begin_inset space \space{}
13205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13209 \begin_inset space \space{}
13215 \begin_inset space ~
13223 \begin_inset space ~
13233 but you can also select your own.
13234 \begin_inset Newline newline
13237 The differences between roman,
13240 \begin_inset space ~
13249 fonts are explained in section
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13256 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13261 \begin_inset Newline newline
13267 \begin_inset space ~
13272 was originally designed for newspapers.
13273 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13274 into the small newspaper columns.
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13283 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13286 \begin_layout Standard
13287 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13300 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13305 depends on the class you are using.
13306 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13309 \begin_layout Standard
13310 Note that the font size is the
13315 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13316 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13317 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13318 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13321 \begin_inset space ~
13327 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13328 \begin_inset space ~
13332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13334 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13341 \begin_layout Standard
13345 \begin_inset space ~
13350 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13352 \begin_inset space ~
13355 serif or typewriter.
13360 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13370 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13373 \begin_layout Standard
13378 LaTeX font encoding
13380 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13381 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13387 \begin_inset Index idx
13390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13392 -packages ! fontenc
13398 \begin_inset space ~
13402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13404 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13409 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13410 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13417 \begin_layout Standard
13418 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13420 Use Old Style Figures
13424 Use True Small Caps
13427 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13430 Use Old Style Figures
13432 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13434 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13442 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13446 Use True Small Caps
13448 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13449 of scaled capitals.
13450 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13451 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13454 \begin_layout Standard
13459 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13460 a font to display the script characters.
13464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13465 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13471 \begin_inset Index idx
13474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13481 So this has no effect for the document language
13495 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13499 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13507 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13512 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13513 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13515 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13517 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13520 dialog, see section
13521 \begin_inset space ~
13525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13527 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13539 \begin_layout Subsection
13543 \begin_layout Standard
13544 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13545 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13547 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13548 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13549 choose a math font in the dialog
13551 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13555 \begin_inset Index idx
13558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13559 Document ! Settings
13565 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13566 automatically selects a math font.
13567 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13568 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13577 \begin_inset space ~
13583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13588 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13589 document font is available.
13592 \begin_layout Standard
13593 Note that the math font will not be used for
13597 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13603 or by the insertion of the command
13610 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13611 \begin_inset space ~
13615 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13616 while the math characters do not.
13618 \begin_inset space ~
13621 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13624 \begin_inset space ~
13632 \begin_inset space ~
13637 in the document font settings.
13640 \begin_layout Standard
13641 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13642 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13643 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13644 font (in most cases
13645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13651 \begin_inset space ~
13657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13660 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13661 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13669 \begin_inset space ~
13675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13681 \begin_layout Subsection
13682 Using Different Character Styles
13683 \begin_inset Index idx
13686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13693 \begin_inset Index idx
13696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13705 \begin_layout Standard
13706 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13707 automatically changes the character style for certain
13708 paragraph environments.
13710 supports two character styles,
13719 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13723 \begin_layout Standard
13728 style, do one of the following:
13731 \begin_layout Itemize
13732 click on the toolbar button
13741 \begin_layout Itemize
13742 use the key binding
13751 \begin_layout Standard
13752 These commands are all toggles.
13757 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13760 \begin_layout Standard
13761 One typically uses the
13765 style for proper names.
13767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13774 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13782 \begin_layout Standard
13783 A more widely used character style is the
13788 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13795 \begin_layout Itemize
13796 clicking on the toolbar button
13805 \begin_layout Itemize
13806 using the keybindings
13815 \begin_layout Standard
13820 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13822 use a different font.
13825 \begin_layout Standard
13826 We've been using the
13830 style all over the place in this document.
13831 Here's one more example:
13834 \begin_layout Quotation
13837 Do not overuse character styles!
13840 \begin_layout Standard
13841 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13842 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13843 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13844 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13848 \begin_layout Standard
13849 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13859 \begin_inset space ~
13862 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13868 arg "dialog-show character"
13874 \begin_layout Subsection
13875 Fine-Tuning with the
13880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13882 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13887 \begin_inset Index idx
13890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13899 \begin_layout Standard
13900 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13902 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13903 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13904 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13905 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13906 from ordinary dialog.
13909 \begin_layout Standard
13910 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13911 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13912 \begin_inset Newline newline
13915 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13916 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13919 \begin_layout Standard
13920 To use custom character styles, open the
13922 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13924 \begin_inset space ~
13927 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13930 dialog or press the toolbar button
13933 arg "dialog-show character"
13937 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13938 font property that you can choose.
13939 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13942 \begin_inset space ~
13947 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13952 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13953 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13954 environments all at once.
13957 \begin_layout Standard
13958 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13961 \begin_inset space ~
13973 \begin_layout Labeling
13974 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13988 The possible options are:
13992 \begin_layout Labeling
13993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13998 This is the Roman font family.
13999 Normally a serif font.
14000 It's also the default family.
14010 \begin_layout Labeling
14011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14015 \begin_inset space ~
14022 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14034 \begin_layout Labeling
14035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14042 This is the Typewriter font family.
14048 arg "font-typewriter"
14057 \begin_layout Labeling
14058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14063 This corresponds to the print weight.
14068 \begin_layout Labeling
14069 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14074 This is the Medium font series.
14075 It's also the default series.
14078 \begin_layout Labeling
14079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14086 This is the Bold font series.
14099 \begin_layout Labeling
14100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14105 As the name implies.
14110 \begin_layout Labeling
14111 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14116 This is the Upright font shape.
14117 It's also the default shape.
14120 \begin_layout Labeling
14121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14135 s the Italic font shape
14141 \begin_layout Labeling
14142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14149 This is the Slanted font shape
14151 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14152 , this is different from italic).
14155 \begin_layout Labeling
14156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14160 \begin_inset space ~
14167 This is the Small caps font shape
14174 \begin_layout Labeling
14175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14180 Alters the text color.
14181 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14185 \begin_inset space ~
14190 , which means that the document default color set in
14192 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14193 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14199 \begin_inset space ~
14204 is used, you can choose between
14281 \begin_inset Index idx
14284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14293 \begin_layout Labeling
14294 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14299 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14300 the language of the document.
14301 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14302 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14304 \begin_inset Newline newline
14307 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14309 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14310 When using the spell checking (see section
14311 \begin_inset space ~
14315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14317 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14321 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14324 \begin_layout Labeling
14325 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14330 Alters the size of the font.
14331 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14332 proportional to the document font size.
14333 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14334 the details, but a general description of what
14340 \begin_layout Labeling
14341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14362 arg "font-size tiny"
14368 \begin_layout Labeling
14369 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14390 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14396 \begin_layout Labeling
14397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14418 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14424 \begin_layout Labeling
14425 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14446 arg "font-size small"
14452 \begin_layout Labeling
14453 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14467 It's also the default size.
14471 arg "font-size normal"
14477 \begin_layout Labeling
14478 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14499 arg "font-size large"
14505 \begin_layout Labeling
14506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14527 arg "font-size larger"
14533 \begin_layout Labeling
14534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14555 arg "font-size largest"
14561 \begin_layout Labeling
14562 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14583 arg "font-size huge"
14589 \begin_layout Labeling
14590 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14611 arg "font-size giant"
14617 \begin_layout Labeling
14618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14623 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14643 arg "font-size increase"
14649 \begin_layout Labeling
14650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14655 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14675 arg "font-size decrease"
14682 \begin_layout Standard
14687 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14688 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14690 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14691 — use those instead.
14692 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14695 \begin_layout Labeling
14696 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14701 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14706 \begin_layout Labeling
14707 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14714 This is text with emphasize on
14717 This might seem like the same as
14721 , but it is actually a bit different.
14727 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14729 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14732 \begin_layout Labeling
14733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14740 This is text with Underbar on.
14746 arg "font-underline"
14752 \begin_inset Newline newline
14757 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14758 when you could not change fonts.
14759 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14760 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14761 because some people
14765 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14768 \begin_layout Labeling
14769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14780 This is text with Double underbar on.
14786 arg "font-underunderline"
14790 \begin_inset Newline newline
14793 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14794 about double underbar.
14797 \begin_layout Labeling
14798 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14802 \begin_inset space ~
14809 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14815 arg "font-underwave"
14819 \begin_inset Newline newline
14822 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14823 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14826 \begin_layout Labeling
14827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14834 This is text with Strikeout on.
14840 arg "font-strikeout"
14844 \begin_inset Newline newline
14847 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14848 changed in the meantime.
14851 \begin_layout Labeling
14852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14859 This is text with Noun on.
14866 , this is a logical attribute.
14867 Normally it's equivalent to
14870 \begin_inset space ~
14879 \begin_layout Standard
14880 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14881 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14885 \begin_inset space ~
14888 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14894 arg "dialog-show character"
14897 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14898 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14901 arg "textstyle-apply"
14905 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14909 \begin_layout Standard
14910 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14917 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14918 (suppose you just set the shape to
14919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14937 \begin_inset space ~
14949 \begin_layout Standard
14950 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14958 \begin_inset space ~
14970 \begin_layout Itemize
14976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14983 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15001 \begin_inset Newline newline
15005 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15019 \begin_inset Note Note
15022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15023 For more on phantoms see section
15024 \begin_inset space ~
15028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15030 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15040 \begin_inset Newline newline
15046 \begin_layout Itemize
15051 fonts use characters with serifs.
15052 These are the small
15053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15060 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15061 The following example shows the difference:
15062 \begin_inset Newline newline
15066 \begin_inset Newline newline
15071 text without serifs
15074 \begin_inset Newline newline
15077 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15078 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15085 \begin_layout Itemize
15090 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15091 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15092 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15095 \begin_layout Standard
15096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15103 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15104 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15107 \begin_inset space ~
15112 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15113 the property to be removed.
15114 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15115 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15116 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15134 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15135 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15143 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15147 \begin_inset space ~
15152 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15163 If you, for example, set
15164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15182 \begin_inset space ~
15187 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15196 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15199 \begin_layout Standard
15200 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15201 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15204 \begin_layout Section
15205 Printing and Previewing
15208 \begin_layout Subsection
15212 \begin_layout Standard
15213 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15214 using \SpecialChar LyX
15215 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15216 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15217 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15218 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15220 Additional Features
15225 \begin_layout Standard
15227 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15230 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15231 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15232 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15235 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15236 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15237 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15238 to turn your writing into printable output.
15239 This happens in two stages:
15242 \begin_layout Enumerate
15243 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15244 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15246 a file with the extension,
15247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15261 \begin_layout Enumerate
15262 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15263 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15264 to use the commands in the
15268 file to produce printable output.
15271 \begin_layout Subsection
15272 Output file formats
15273 \begin_inset Index idx
15276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15285 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15293 Simple text (ASCII)
15294 \begin_inset Index idx
15297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15298 File formats ! ASCII
15306 \begin_layout Standard
15307 This file type has the extension
15308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15320 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15324 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15331 \begin_layout Standard
15332 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15334 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15337 \begin_inset space ~
15343 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15344 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15345 bibliography (section
15346 \begin_inset space ~
15350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15352 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15357 If your document includes such material, use
15359 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15360 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15362 \begin_inset space ~
15366 \begin_inset space ~
15370 \begin_inset space ~
15378 \begin_inset space ~
15382 \begin_inset space ~
15388 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15389 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15395 \begin_inset Index idx
15398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15399 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 \begin_layout Standard
15409 This file type has the extension
15410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15421 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15424 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15425 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15426 -Errors or to process it manually
15427 with console commands.
15428 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15429 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15430 's temporary directory whenever you
15431 view or export your document.
15434 \begin_layout Standard
15435 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15436 -file using the menu
15438 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15439 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15443 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15444 export variants are explained in section
15445 \begin_inset space ~
15449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15451 reference "subsec:Export"
15458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15460 \begin_inset Index idx
15463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15472 \begin_layout Standard
15473 This file type has the extension
15474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15494 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15495 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15496 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15500 \begin_layout Standard
15501 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15502 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15503 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15504 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15505 when you view the DVI.
15506 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15509 \begin_layout Standard
15510 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15512 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15513 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15518 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15519 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15521 \begin_inset space ~
15527 The latter option uses the program
15529 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15535 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15538 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15539 font access (see section
15540 \begin_inset space ~
15544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15546 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15551 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15552 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15559 \begin_inset Index idx
15562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15563 File formats ! PostScript
15571 \begin_layout Standard
15572 This file type has the extension
15573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15585 PostScript was developed by the company
15589 as a printer language.
15590 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15592 PostScript can be seen as a
15593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15596 programming language
15597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15600 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15605 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15612 \begin_inset Index idx
15615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15617 -packages ! pstricks
15627 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15630 \begin_layout Standard
15631 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15635 Encapsulated PostScript
15636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15639 (EPS, file extension
15640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15652 As \SpecialChar LyX
15653 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15654 convert them in the background to EPS.
15655 If, for example, you have 50
15656 \begin_inset space ~
15659 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15661 \begin_inset space ~
15664 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15665 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15667 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15668 EPS to avoid this problem.
15671 \begin_layout Standard
15672 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15674 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15675 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15681 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15683 \begin_inset Index idx
15686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15693 \begin_inset Index idx
15696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15705 \begin_layout Standard
15706 This file type has the extension
15707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15723 Portable Document Format
15724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15731 was derived from PostScript.
15732 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15741 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15742 looks exactly the same.
15745 \begin_layout Standard
15746 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15750 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15754 (JPG, file extension
15755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15782 Portable Network Graphics
15783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15786 (PNG, file extension
15787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15799 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15800 converts them in the
15801 background to one of these formats.
15802 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15803 will slow down your workflow.
15804 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15807 \begin_layout Standard
15808 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15810 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15816 \begin_layout Description
15818 \begin_inset space ~
15821 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15825 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15828 \begin_layout Description
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15837 ) This uses the program
15839 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15842 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15845 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15848 is a new engine, derived from
15852 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15853 access (see section
15854 \begin_inset space ~
15858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15860 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15865 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15866 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15871 \begin_layout Description
15873 \begin_inset space ~
15880 ) This uses the program
15885 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15891 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15892 font access (see section
15893 \begin_inset space ~
15897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15899 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15904 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15905 vertically written Japanese.
15908 \begin_layout Description
15910 \begin_inset space ~
15913 (cropped) This is the same as
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15921 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15922 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15923 to generate good-looking
15924 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15927 \begin_layout Description
15929 \begin_inset space ~
15932 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15936 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15940 \begin_layout Description
15942 \begin_inset space ~
15945 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15949 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15950 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15954 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15955 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15958 \begin_layout Standard
15962 \begin_inset space ~
15971 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15972 works without problems.
15973 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15974 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15978 \begin_inset space ~
15986 \begin_inset space ~
15991 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16001 \begin_inset Index idx
16004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16005 FileFormats ! XHTML
16011 \begin_inset Index idx
16014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16024 This file type has the extension
16025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16037 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16038 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16039 When \SpecialChar LyX
16040 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16041 suitable for the purpose.
16042 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16045 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16048 between different formats, which are described in section
16050 Math Output in XHTML
16055 \begin_inset space ~
16063 \begin_layout Standard
16064 XHTML output remains
16065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16072 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16073 features are supported yet.
16077 and the World Wide Web
16081 Additional Features
16083 manual, for more information.
16086 \begin_layout Standard
16087 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16089 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16090 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16096 \begin_layout Subsection
16098 \begin_inset Index idx
16101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16110 \begin_layout Standard
16111 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16112 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16121 or use the toolbar button
16128 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16129 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16130 \begin_inset space ~
16134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16136 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16140 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16142 \begin_inset space ~
16146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16148 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16153 Further output formats can be selected via
16155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16156 View (Other Formats)
16158 or the toolbar button
16167 \begin_layout Standard
16168 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16169 viewer window using the menu
16171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16176 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16177 Update (Other Formats)
16182 \begin_layout Standard
16183 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16186 To have a real output, export your document.
16189 \begin_layout Section
16190 A few Words about Typography
16191 \begin_inset Index idx
16194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16203 \begin_layout Subsection
16204 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16205 \begin_inset Index idx
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16215 \begin_inset Index idx
16218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16227 \begin_layout Standard
16228 In \SpecialChar LyX
16230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16241 character comes in four lengths: the
16253 , and the minus sign:
16254 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16260 \begin_layout Standard
16261 \begin_inset Tabular
16262 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16263 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16264 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16265 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16266 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16267 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16336 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16361 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16363 \begin_inset space ~
16366 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16373 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16400 \begin_inset space ~
16403 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16458 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16464 \begin_layout Standard
16465 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16477 character multiple times in a row.
16478 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16479 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16512 \begin_layout Standard
16513 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16514 math mode and has a length of its own.
16515 Here are some examples:
16518 \begin_layout Enumerate
16519 line- and page-breaks
16520 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16530 \begin_layout Enumerate
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Enumerate
16543 Oh — there's a dash.
16544 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16554 \begin_layout Enumerate
16555 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16559 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16569 \begin_layout Subsection
16571 \begin_inset Index idx
16574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16583 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16590 \begin_layout Standard
16591 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16592 but automatically in the output.
16593 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16599 \begin_inset Index idx
16602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16609 following the rules of the document language.
16612 \begin_layout Standard
16614 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16618 font and with unusual constructs, like
16619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16627 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16628 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16629 This is done with the menu
16631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16632 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16634 \begin_inset space ~
16640 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16642 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16646 \begin_layout Standard
16647 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16648 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16659 would then see the hyphen
16660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16667 as a hyphenation possibility.
16668 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16669 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16670 as described in section
16672 Prevent Hyphenation
16677 \begin_inset space ~
16685 \begin_layout Subsection
16687 \begin_inset Index idx
16690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16700 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16703 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16710 \begin_layout Standard
16711 When \SpecialChar LyX
16712 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16713 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16715 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16721 appropriate amount of space.
16722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16725 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16727 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16728 gets after another word.
16731 \begin_layout Standard
16732 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16733 not work in all cases.
16735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16746 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16747 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16750 \begin_layout Standard
16751 Here are some examples of
16755 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16758 \begin_layout Itemize
16763 \begin_layout Itemize
16768 \begin_layout Standard
16769 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16772 \begin_layout Itemize
16774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16778 this is too much space!
16781 \begin_layout Itemize
16786 \begin_layout Standard
16787 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16794 \begin_layout Enumerate
16798 \begin_inset space ~
16803 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16804 \begin_inset space ~
16808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16810 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16815 \begin_inset Index idx
16818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16819 Spaces ! inter-word
16827 \begin_layout Enumerate
16831 \begin_inset space ~
16836 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16837 \begin_inset space ~
16841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16843 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16848 \begin_inset Index idx
16851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16860 \begin_layout Enumerate
16864 \begin_inset space ~
16868 \begin_inset space ~
16872 \begin_inset space ~
16879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16881 \begin_inset space ~
16886 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16887 This function is also bound to
16890 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16896 \begin_layout Standard
16897 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16900 \begin_layout Itemize
16902 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16906 \begin_inset space \space{}
16909 this is too much space!
16912 \begin_layout Itemize
16913 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16917 \begin_layout Standard
16918 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16919 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16921 will take care of this.
16924 \begin_layout Standard
16925 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16929 \begin_inset space ~
16935 feature described in the section
16937 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16942 Additional Features
16947 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16949 \begin_inset Index idx
16952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16953 Typography ! Quotation marks
16959 \begin_inset Index idx
16962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16963 Quotation marks | see
16967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16993 \begin_layout Standard
16995 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
16996 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
16997 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
16999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17007 The keyboard character,
17011 , generates this automatically.
17014 \begin_layout Standard
17015 You can specify what character the
17019 key produces by using the submenu
17025 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17029 \begin_inset Index idx
17032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17033 Document ! Settings
17038 dialog and switching the
17042 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17043 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17045 \begin_inset space ~
17051 \begin_layout Labeling
17052 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17064 \begin_inset space ~
17068 \begin_inset space ~
17072 \begin_inset Quotes els
17076 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17090 \begin_inset Quotes els
17094 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17097 quotation marks (as common, e.
17098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17104 \begin_layout Labeling
17105 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17108 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17112 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17116 \begin_inset space ~
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17128 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17134 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17138 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17142 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17146 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17149 quotation marks (as common, e.
17150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17156 \begin_layout Labeling
17157 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17160 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17164 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17168 \begin_inset space ~
17172 \begin_inset space ~
17176 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17180 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17186 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17190 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17194 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17198 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17201 quotation marks (as common, e.
17202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17208 \begin_layout Labeling
17209 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17212 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17216 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17220 \begin_inset space ~
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17232 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17238 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17242 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17246 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17250 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17253 quotation marks (as common, e.
17254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17260 \begin_layout Labeling
17261 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17264 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17268 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17272 \begin_inset space ~
17276 \begin_inset space ~
17280 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17284 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17290 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17294 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17298 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17302 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17305 quotation marks (as common, e.
17306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17309 g., in Switzerland)
17312 \begin_layout Labeling
17313 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17316 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17320 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17324 \begin_inset space ~
17328 \begin_inset space ~
17332 \begin_inset Quotes als
17336 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17342 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17346 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17350 \begin_inset Quotes als
17354 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17357 quotation marks (as common, e.
17358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17364 \begin_layout Labeling
17365 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17368 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17372 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17376 \begin_inset space ~
17380 \begin_inset space ~
17384 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17388 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17394 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17398 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17402 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17406 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17409 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17412 \begin_layout Labeling
17413 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17416 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17420 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17424 \begin_inset space ~
17428 \begin_inset space ~
17432 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17436 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17442 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17446 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17450 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17454 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17457 quotation marks (as common, e.
17458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17461 g., in Great Britain)
17464 \begin_layout Labeling
17465 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17468 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17472 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17476 \begin_inset space ~
17480 \begin_inset space ~
17484 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17488 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17494 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17498 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17502 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17506 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17509 quotation marks (as common, e.
17510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17516 \begin_layout Labeling
17517 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17520 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17524 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17528 \begin_inset space ~
17532 \begin_inset space ~
17536 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17540 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17546 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17554 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17558 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17561 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17566 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17567 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17568 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17569 the inner marks differ).
17577 \begin_layout Labeling
17578 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17581 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17585 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17589 \begin_inset space ~
17593 \begin_inset space ~
17597 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17601 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17607 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17611 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17615 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17619 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17622 quotation marks (as common, e.
17623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17629 \begin_layout Labeling
17630 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17633 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17637 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17641 \begin_inset space ~
17645 \begin_inset space ~
17649 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17653 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17659 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17663 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17667 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17671 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17674 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17677 \begin_layout Labeling
17678 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17679 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17687 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17693 \begin_inset space ~
17697 \begin_inset space ~
17703 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17711 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17715 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17719 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17723 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17727 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17730 quotation marks (as common, e.
17731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17739 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17740 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17748 \begin_layout Labeling
17749 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17750 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17758 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17764 \begin_inset space ~
17768 \begin_inset space ~
17774 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17782 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17786 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17790 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17794 \begin_inset Quotes kls
17798 \begin_inset Quotes krs
17801 quotation marks (as common, e.
17802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17805 g., in North Korea and China)
17809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17810 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17811 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17819 \begin_layout Standard
17820 Inner quotation marks
17824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17825 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
17826 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
17827 case (and specifically the British style shows that
17828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17835 does not necessarily mean
17836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17844 This is why we call them
17845 \begin_inset Quotes els
17849 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17865 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
17867 \begin_inset Quotes els
17871 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17874 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
17877 arg "quote-insert inner"
17882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17888 \begin_layout Standard
17889 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
17890 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
17891 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
17892 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
17893 If you check the setting
17895 Use dynamic quotation marks
17899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17900 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17903 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
17904 they appear in a special color).
17905 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
17906 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
17908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17911 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
17914 \begin_layout Standard
17915 Individual quotation marks (i.
17916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17919 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
17920 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
17924 \begin_layout Subsection
17926 \begin_inset Index idx
17929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17930 Typography ! Ligatures
17936 \begin_inset Index idx
17939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17970 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17977 \begin_layout Standard
17978 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17979 print them as single characters.
17980 These groups are known as
17985 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17986 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17988 Here are the standard ligatures:
17991 \begin_layout Itemize
17995 \begin_layout Itemize
17999 \begin_layout Itemize
18003 \begin_layout Itemize
18007 \begin_layout Itemize
18011 \begin_layout Standard
18012 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18015 \begin_layout Standard
18016 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18017 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18025 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18041 To break a ligature, use
18043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18044 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18046 \begin_inset space ~
18053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18064 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18081 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18089 \begin_layout Subsection
18091 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18093 \begin_inset Index idx
18096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18106 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18113 \begin_layout Standard
18116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18117 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18121 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18124 \begin_layout Description
18126 The name of the game.
18129 \begin_layout Description
18131 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18135 \begin_layout Description
18137 The \SpecialChar TeX
18138 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18142 \begin_layout Description
18143 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18144 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18148 \begin_layout Standard
18149 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18155 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18163 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18164 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18165 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18166 converges to the number
18167 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18170 : The actual version is
18171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18179 , the previous one was
18180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18191 \begin_layout Subsection
18193 \begin_inset Index idx
18196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18205 \begin_layout Standard
18206 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18207 space between two words.
18208 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18218 for units use the menu
18220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18221 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18223 \begin_inset space ~
18231 arg "space-insert thin"
18237 \begin_layout Standard
18238 Here is an example to show the differences:
18241 \begin_layout Standard
18242 \begin_inset Tabular
18243 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18244 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18246 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18253 \begin_inset space ~
18257 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18269 space between number and unit
18276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18285 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18297 half space between number and unit
18310 \begin_layout Subsection
18312 \begin_inset Index idx
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18316 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18324 \begin_layout Standard
18325 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18327 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18328 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18329 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18330 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18331 These bits of text became known as
18342 \begin_layout Standard
18343 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18344 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18345 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18346 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18347 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18348 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18349 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18350 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18351 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18352 \begin_inset Newline newline
18360 \begin_inset Newline newline
18368 \begin_inset Newline newline
18371 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18372 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18373 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18375 \begin_inset space ~
18379 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18381 key "latexcompanion"
18387 \begin_inset space ~
18391 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18398 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18399 's page break mechanism.
18402 \begin_layout Chapter
18403 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18406 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18413 \begin_layout Standard
18414 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18417 \begin_inset space ~
18423 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18426 \begin_layout Section
18428 \begin_inset Index idx
18431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18447 \begin_layout Standard
18449 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18452 \begin_layout Description
18455 \begin_inset space ~
18458 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18459 \begin_inset Newline newline
18463 \begin_inset Note Note
18466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18467 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18475 \begin_layout Description
18476 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18477 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18478 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18481 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18482 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18484 \begin_inset space ~
18490 \begin_inset Newline newline
18494 \begin_inset Note Comment
18497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18498 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18507 \begin_layout Description
18509 \begin_inset space ~
18512 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18513 set in the document settings under
18515 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18517 \begin_inset space ~
18523 \begin_inset Newline newline
18527 \begin_inset Newline newline
18531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18540 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18541 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18546 of a comment that appears in the output.
18552 \begin_inset Newline newline
18556 \begin_inset Newline newline
18559 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18562 \begin_layout Standard
18563 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18575 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18578 \begin_layout Section
18580 \begin_inset Index idx
18583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18592 name "sec:Footnotes"
18599 \begin_layout Standard
18601 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18607 or the toolbar button
18610 arg "footnote-insert"
18622 \begin_inset Graphics
18623 filename clipart/footnote.png
18632 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18633 's representation of your footnote.
18643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18662 label, the box will
18666 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18667 Clicking on the box label again will close
18680 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18681 and click on the footnote
18696 \begin_layout Standard
18697 Here is an example footnote:
18705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18706 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18714 \begin_layout Standard
18715 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18716 position where the footnote box is placed.
18717 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18718 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18719 according to the document class.
18721 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18722 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18728 ey are described in the
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18739 \begin_layout Section
18741 \begin_inset Index idx
18744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18753 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18760 \begin_layout Standard
18761 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18763 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18767 \begin_inset space ~
18772 or the toolbar button
18775 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18801 appearing within your text.
18802 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18803 's representation of your margin
18812 \begin_layout Standard
18813 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18817 \begin_inset Marginal
18820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 This is a marginal note.
18830 \begin_layout Standard
18831 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18832 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18833 pages, right on odd pages.
18836 \begin_layout Standard
18837 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18840 \begin_inset space ~
18848 \begin_inset space ~
18856 \begin_layout Section
18857 Graphics and Images
18858 \begin_inset Index idx
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18868 \begin_inset Index idx
18871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18880 name "sec:Graphics"
18887 \begin_layout Standard
18888 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18889 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18892 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18901 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18904 \begin_layout Standard
18905 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18910 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18911 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18913 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18914 \begin_inset space ~
18918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18920 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18927 \begin_layout Standard
18932 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18933 of the image in the output.
18934 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18938 \begin_inset space ~
18942 \begin_inset space ~
18951 \begin_inset space ~
18955 \begin_inset space ~
18959 \begin_inset space ~
18964 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18965 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18973 \begin_layout Standard
18977 \begin_inset space ~
18981 \begin_inset space ~
18986 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18987 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18989 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18994 \begin_inset space ~
18999 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19000 with the image size is printed.
19003 \begin_layout Standard
19004 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19005 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19007 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19010 \begin_layout Standard
19012 \begin_inset Graphics
19013 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19021 \begin_layout Standard
19022 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19023 the image into a float, see section
19024 \begin_inset space ~
19028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19030 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19037 \begin_layout Subsection
19039 \begin_inset Index idx
19042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19051 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19058 \begin_layout Standard
19059 You can insert images in any known file format.
19060 But as we explained in section
19061 \begin_inset space ~
19065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19067 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19071 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19073 therefore uses the program
19077 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19078 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19079 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19080 \begin_inset space ~
19084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19086 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19093 \begin_layout Standard
19094 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19097 \begin_layout Description
19099 \begin_inset space ~
19102 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19103 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19104 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19108 Graphics Interchange Format
19109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19112 (GIF, file extension
19113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19125 \begin_inset Index idx
19128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19160 Portable Network Graphics
19161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19164 (PNG, file extension
19165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19177 \begin_inset Index idx
19180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19212 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19216 (JPG, file extension
19217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19241 \begin_inset Index idx
19244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19275 \begin_layout Description
19277 \begin_inset space ~
19280 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19282 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19283 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19284 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19285 \begin_inset Newline newline
19288 Scalable image formats can be
19289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19292 Scalable Vector Graphics
19293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19296 (SVG, file extension
19297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19309 \begin_inset Index idx
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19344 Encapsulated PostScript
19345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19348 (EPS, file extension
19349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19361 \begin_inset Index idx
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19396 Portable Document Format
19397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19400 (PDF, file extension
19401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19413 \begin_inset Index idx
19416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19431 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19432 result will not be scalable.
19433 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19439 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19447 \begin_layout Standard
19448 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19455 \begin_layout Subsection
19456 Grouping of Image Settings
19457 \begin_inset Index idx
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19461 Images ! Settings grouping
19469 \begin_layout Standard
19470 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19472 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19473 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19475 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19476 need to manually change each of them.
19480 \begin_layout Standard
19481 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19484 \begin_inset space ~
19488 \begin_inset space ~
19500 \begin_inset space ~
19504 \begin_inset space ~
19510 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19511 and checking the name of the desired group.
19514 \begin_layout Section
19516 \begin_inset Index idx
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19535 \begin_layout Standard
19536 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19539 arg "tabular-insert"
19544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19548 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19549 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19550 from the rest of the table.
19551 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19552 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19554 Here is an example table:
19557 \begin_layout Standard
19559 \begin_inset Tabular
19560 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19561 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19562 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19563 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19564 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19565 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19765 \begin_layout Subsection
19769 \begin_layout Standard
19770 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19773 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19777 This brings up the table dialog.
19778 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19779 cursor is placed currently.
19780 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19781 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19782 done on all of your selection.
19785 \begin_layout Standard
19786 In addition to the table dialog, the
19789 \begin_inset space ~
19794 helps you in setting table properties.
19795 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19798 \begin_layout Standard
19802 \begin_inset space ~
19807 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19808 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19809 current cell respectively.
19810 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19812 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19813 of text, see section
19814 \begin_inset space ~
19818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19820 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19827 \begin_layout Standard
19828 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19829 using the check box
19838 This will merge the cells to
19842 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19843 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19844 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19845 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19846 in the last row without the upper border:
19849 \begin_layout Standard
19851 \begin_inset Tabular
19852 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19853 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19854 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19855 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19857 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19953 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 \begin_layout Standard
19989 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19990 -arguments for the table.
19991 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19992 explained in the chapter
19999 \begin_inset space ~
20005 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20006 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20007 but are visible in the output.
20010 \begin_layout Standard
20011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 Most DVI-viewers are
20023 able to display rotations.
20031 \begin_layout Standard
20036 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20041 adds lines for all cell borders.
20044 \begin_layout Subsection
20046 \begin_inset Index idx
20049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 Tables ! Multi-page
20056 \begin_inset Index idx
20059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 \begin_layout Standard
20069 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20072 \begin_inset space ~
20076 \begin_inset space ~
20084 \begin_inset space ~
20089 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20090 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20093 \begin_layout Description
20098 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20099 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20100 Except for the first page, if
20103 \begin_inset space ~
20111 \begin_layout Description
20115 \begin_inset space ~
20120 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20121 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20124 \begin_layout Description
20129 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20130 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20131 except for the last page, if
20134 \begin_inset space ~
20142 \begin_layout Description
20146 \begin_inset space ~
20151 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20152 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20155 \begin_layout Description
20156 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20157 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20163 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20166 \begin_inset space ~
20174 \begin_layout Standard
20175 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20176 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20177 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20183 In this context, first means first in this order:
20186 \begin_inset space ~
20198 \begin_inset space ~
20203 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20206 \begin_layout Standard
20208 \begin_inset Tabular
20209 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20210 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20211 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20212 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20213 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20214 <row endfirsthead="true">
20215 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20221 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20226 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20245 <row endfirsthead="true">
20246 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <row endhead="true">
20279 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20290 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <row endhead="true">
20310 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20321 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20330 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 <row endfoot="true">
20343 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20363 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20394 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21335 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21364 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21426 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21457 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21488 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21643 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21705 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21767 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21860 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21891 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21953 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21984 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22077 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22139 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22201 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22232 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22263 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22294 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <row endlastfoot="true">
22325 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22336 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22345 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 \begin_layout Subsection
22364 \begin_inset Index idx
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22376 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22383 \begin_layout Standard
22384 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22385 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22386 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22387 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22391 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22394 \begin_layout Standard
22395 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22396 for the column in the table dialog.
22397 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22398 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22402 \begin_layout Standard
22404 \begin_inset Tabular
22405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22408 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22498 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 This is longer now.
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22610 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22611 This is longer now.
22616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22642 \begin_layout Standard
22643 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22644 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22649 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22650 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22656 Selection with the mouse or with
22660 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22661 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22662 the selection from outside the table.
22665 \begin_layout Section
22667 \begin_inset Index idx
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22686 \begin_layout Subsection
22690 \begin_layout Standard
22691 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22692 have a fixed location.
22694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22701 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22709 \begin_inset space ~
22714 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22715 too many notes on the current page.
22718 \begin_layout Standard
22719 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22720 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22721 and pages without text.
22722 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22723 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22724 Floats are therefore numbered.
22725 Referencing is described in section
22726 \begin_inset space ~
22730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22732 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22739 \begin_layout Standard
22740 To insert a float, use the menu
22742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22746 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22747 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22749 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22750 \begin_inset Index idx
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22759 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22760 paragraph within the float.
22761 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22762 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22763 left-clicking on the box label.
22764 A closed float box looks like this:
22765 \begin_inset Graphics
22766 filename clipart/float.png
22771 – a gray button with a red label.
22774 \begin_layout Standard
22775 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22777 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22780 \begin_layout Subsection
22782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22784 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22789 \begin_inset Index idx
22792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 Floats ! Figure floats
22801 \begin_layout Standard
22803 \begin_inset space ~
22807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22809 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22813 was created using the menu
22815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22816 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22822 arg "float-insert figure"
22826 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22835 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22839 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22840 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22842 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22844 \begin_inset space ~
22852 arg "layout-paragraph"
22858 \begin_layout Standard
22859 \begin_inset Float figure
22864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22866 \begin_inset Graphics
22867 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22882 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22886 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22899 \begin_layout Standard
22900 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22901 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22903 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22912 ) and refer to it using the menu
22914 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22920 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22924 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22925 vague references like
22926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22933 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22934 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22944 For more about cross-references, see section
22945 \begin_inset space ~
22949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22951 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22958 \begin_layout Standard
22959 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22960 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22961 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22962 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22963 as described in section
22964 \begin_inset space ~
22968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22970 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22976 \begin_inset space ~
22980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22982 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22986 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22987 You can also set the images one below the other.
22989 \begin_inset space ~
22993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22995 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23002 reference "fig:Platypus"
23006 are the subfigures.
23009 \begin_layout Standard
23010 \begin_inset Float figure
23015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23016 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23020 \begin_inset Float figure
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23026 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23031 name "fig:Undefinable"
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 \begin_inset Graphics
23045 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23056 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23060 \begin_inset Float figure
23065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23071 name "fig:Platypus"
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 \begin_inset Graphics
23085 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23097 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23104 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23107 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23109 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23113 Two distorted images.
23126 \begin_layout Subsection
23128 \begin_inset Index idx
23131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23132 Floats ! Table floats
23140 \begin_layout Standard
23141 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23144 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23147 or the toolbar button
23150 arg "float-insert table"
23154 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23155 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23156 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23158 \begin_inset space ~
23162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23164 reference "tab:Table-float"
23171 \begin_layout Standard
23172 \begin_inset Float table
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23178 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23181 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23183 name "tab:Table-float"
23195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23197 \begin_inset Tabular
23198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23199 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23329 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23353 \end{array}\right]$
23361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23395 \begin_layout Subsection
23397 \begin_inset Index idx
23400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23409 \begin_layout Standard
23411 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23412 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23413 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23415 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23423 \begin_inset space ~
23431 \begin_layout Section
23433 \begin_inset Index idx
23436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23445 \begin_layout Standard
23447 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23449 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23450 \begin_inset space \space{}
23457 \begin_layout Standard
23458 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23459 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23461 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23465 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23466 and its alignment within the page.
23469 \begin_layout Standard
23471 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23481 height_special "totalheight"
23486 backgroundcolor "none"
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23492 This is a minipage.
23493 The text is set in an italic style.
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23499 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23500 another formatting.
23508 \begin_layout Standard
23509 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23512 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23516 as described in section
23517 \begin_inset space ~
23521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23523 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23528 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23534 \begin_layout Standard
23535 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23545 height_special "totalheight"
23550 backgroundcolor "none"
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23555 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23561 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23565 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23575 height_special "totalheight"
23580 backgroundcolor "none"
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23585 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23593 \begin_layout Standard
23594 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23600 \begin_layout Standard
23601 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23603 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23610 \begin_inset space ~
23618 \begin_layout Chapter
23619 Mathematical Formulas
23620 \begin_inset Index idx
23623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 \begin_inset Index idx
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23664 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23671 \begin_layout Standard
23672 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23677 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23680 \begin_layout Section
23682 \begin_inset Index idx
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23694 \begin_layout Standard
23695 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23708 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23710 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23711 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23712 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23720 \begin_layout Standard
23721 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23725 \begin_inset space ~
23730 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23733 \begin_layout Standard
23734 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23735 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23738 \begin_layout Standard
23739 This is a line with an inline formula
23740 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23746 \begin_layout Standard
23747 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23748 paragraph, like this one:
23749 \begin_inset Formula
23756 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23759 \begin_layout Standard
23761 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23763 For example, typing
23764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23777 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23778 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23782 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23785 \begin_inset space ~
23793 \begin_layout Subsection
23794 Navigating in Formulas
23795 \begin_inset Index idx
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23807 \begin_layout Standard
23808 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23809 achieved with the arrow keys.
23811 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23812 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23817 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23818 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23822 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23826 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23829 \end{array}\right]$
23837 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23842 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23843 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23846 \begin_layout Standard
23851 , printed in this document as
23852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23856 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23863 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23864 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23865 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23870 For example, if you want
23871 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23879 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23889 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23893 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23898 , since in the latter case only the
23901 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23906 will be under the square root sign:
23907 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23913 \begin_layout Standard
23914 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23916 \begin_inset Formula
23918 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23927 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23928 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23931 \begin_layout Subsection
23935 \begin_layout Standard
23936 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23937 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23941 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23942 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23943 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23944 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23945 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23949 \begin_layout Subsection
23950 Exponents and Subscripts
23951 \begin_inset Index idx
23954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 \begin_inset Index idx
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23973 \begin_layout Standard
23974 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23977 arg "math-superscript"
23983 arg "math-subscript"
23986 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23988 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23991 , type in a formula
23994 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24004 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24010 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24014 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24020 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24026 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24035 , you have to use an extra
24039 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24040 For example, if you want
24041 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24047 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24053 Subscripts are similar: To get
24054 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24060 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24068 \begin_layout Subsection
24070 \begin_inset Index idx
24073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 \begin_layout Standard
24083 Create a fraction either with the command
24089 or by using the icon
24092 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24098 \begin_inset space ~
24104 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24105 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24106 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24111 To move back up, press
24116 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24117 \begin_inset Formula
24119 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24122 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24130 \begin_layout Subsection
24132 \begin_inset Index idx
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24144 \begin_layout Standard
24145 Roots can be created using the
24148 \begin_inset space ~
24156 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24162 arg "math-insert \\root"
24184 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24190 always produces a square root.
24193 \begin_layout Subsection
24194 Operators with Limits
24195 \begin_inset Index idx
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24205 \begin_inset Index idx
24208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24217 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24224 \begin_layout Standard
24226 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24230 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24233 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24234 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24235 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24236 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24237 The sum operator will automatically place its
24238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24245 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24247 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24251 \begin_inset Formula
24253 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24258 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24262 \begin_layout Standard
24263 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24265 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24266 behind the operator and using the menu
24268 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24269 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24271 \begin_inset space ~
24275 \begin_inset space ~
24289 \begin_layout Standard
24290 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24299 \begin_inset Index idx
24302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24309 \begin_inset Formula
24311 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24316 which will place the
24317 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24329 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24330 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24336 \begin_layout Standard
24337 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24344 Have a look at section
24345 \begin_inset space ~
24349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24351 reference "subsec:Functions"
24355 for an explanation of function macros.
24358 \begin_layout Subsection
24360 \begin_inset Index idx
24363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 \begin_layout Standard
24373 Most math symbols can be found in the
24376 \begin_inset space ~
24381 under one of several categories; including
24398 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24402 \begin_layout Standard
24403 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24404 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24405 don't have to use the
24408 \begin_inset space ~
24413 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24415 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24418 \begin_layout Subsection
24420 \begin_inset Index idx
24423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 \begin_layout Standard
24433 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24439 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24445 \begin_inset space ~
24453 arg "math-insert \\space"
24457 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24458 For example, the sequence
24463 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24466 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24468 \begin_inset Graphics
24469 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24474 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24475 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24476 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24477 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24478 , because they are negative
24480 Here are two examples:
24483 \begin_layout Standard
24493 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24499 \begin_layout Standard
24509 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24515 \begin_layout Subsection
24517 \begin_inset Index idx
24520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24529 name "subsec:Functions"
24536 \begin_layout Standard
24540 \begin_inset space ~
24545 contains under the button
24548 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24551 a number of function macros, such as
24552 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24556 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24564 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24571 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24572 avoid confusions, because
24573 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24577 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24583 \begin_layout Standard
24584 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24586 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24590 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24596 \begin_layout Standard
24597 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24598 are placed, as described in section
24599 \begin_inset space ~
24603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24605 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24612 \begin_layout Subsection
24614 \begin_inset Index idx
24617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 \begin_layout Standard
24627 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24629 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24630 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24631 commands, for example, to enter
24632 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24635 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24636 Our example is entered by typing
24641 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24648 \begin_inset space ~
24652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24654 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24658 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24661 \begin_layout Standard
24662 \begin_inset Float table
24667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24668 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24673 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24677 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24687 \begin_inset Tabular
24688 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24689 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24690 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24691 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24692 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24776 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24830 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24884 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24992 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25046 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25100 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25208 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25253 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25274 \begin_layout Standard
25275 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25278 \begin_inset space ~
25286 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25289 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25293 \begin_layout Section
25294 Brackets and Delimiters
25295 \begin_inset Index idx
25298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 \begin_inset Index idx
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25317 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25324 \begin_layout Standard
25325 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25327 For some purposes, using just the keys
25332 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25333 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25334 toolbar delimiter icon
25337 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25341 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25342 \begin_inset Formula
25344 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25352 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25353 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25357 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25360 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25366 \begin_inset Formula
25368 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25376 \begin_layout Standard
25377 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25378 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25382 \begin_layout Standard
25383 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25384 left side and right side.
25385 If you use the option
25388 \begin_inset space ~
25393 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25394 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25396 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25401 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25402 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25405 \begin_layout Standard
25406 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25407 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25408 is to go inside the brackets.
25409 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25414 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25415 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25416 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25420 arg "math-delim ( )"
25426 \begin_layout Section
25427 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25428 \begin_inset Index idx
25431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 \begin_inset Index idx
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 \begin_inset Index idx
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25452 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25460 \begin_layout Standard
25461 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25465 \begin_inset space ~
25473 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25477 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25478 Here is an example:
25479 \begin_inset Formula
25481 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25490 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25491 \begin_inset space ~
25495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25497 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25502 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25503 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25504 This alignment is set in the box
25509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25558 for every column as default.
25559 For example, the sequence
25560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25571 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25572 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25573 corresponds to the relevant column.
25574 The result will look like this:
25575 \begin_inset Formula
25578 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25579 column & has & has\,right\\
25580 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25589 \begin_layout Standard
25590 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25593 arg "newline-insert newline"
25596 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25597 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25599 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25602 or the math toolbar.
25605 \begin_layout Standard
25606 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25607 It can be created with the menu
25609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25610 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25612 \begin_inset space ~
25624 Here is an example:
25625 \begin_inset Formula
25639 \begin_layout Standard
25640 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25643 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25646 arg "newline-insert newline"
25650 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25655 arg "newline-insert newline"
25658 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25666 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25667 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25668 A new row is created by every further entry of
25671 arg "newline-insert newline"
25675 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25676 Here is an example:
25677 \begin_inset Formula
25679 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25680 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25685 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25686 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25687 \begin_inset Formula
25689 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25697 \begin_layout Standard
25698 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25705 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25706 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25709 reference "eq:asquared"
25714 The other types are described in section
25715 \begin_inset space ~
25719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25721 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25728 \begin_layout Section
25729 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25730 \begin_inset Index idx
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25734 Math ! Formula numbering
25740 \begin_inset Index idx
25743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25744 Math ! Referencing formulas
25750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25752 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25759 \begin_layout Standard
25760 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25762 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25763 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25765 \begin_inset space ~
25769 \begin_inset space ~
25777 arg "math-number-toggle"
25781 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25782 within parentheses.
25783 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25784 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25785 the document class.
25786 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25787 separated by a dot:
25788 \begin_inset Formula
25798 arg "math-number-toggle"
25801 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25802 You can only number displayed formulas.
25805 \begin_layout Standard
25806 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25808 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25809 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25811 \begin_inset space ~
25815 \begin_inset space ~
25823 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25826 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25827 \begin_inset Formula
25830 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25836 To number all lines use the shortcut
25839 arg "math-number-toggle"
25845 \begin_layout Standard
25846 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25849 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25850 A label is inserted with the menu
25852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25861 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25862 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25863 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25875 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25876 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25877 We inserted in the following example the label
25878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25885 in the second line:
25886 \begin_inset Formula
25888 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25889 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25894 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25895 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25896 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25900 \begin_inset space ~
25908 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25912 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25913 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25914 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25915 as the formula number:
25918 \begin_layout Standard
25919 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25922 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25929 \begin_layout Standard
25930 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25931 's cross-reference box are described in section
25932 \begin_inset space ~
25936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25938 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25943 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25951 \begin_layout Section
25952 User defined math macros
25953 \begin_inset Index idx
25956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25965 \begin_layout Standard
25967 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25968 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25969 Math macros are explained in section
25972 \begin_inset space ~
25984 \begin_layout Section
25988 \begin_layout Subsection
25990 \begin_inset Index idx
25993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26002 \begin_layout Standard
26003 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26004 To set a font in a formula, use the
26007 \begin_inset space ~
26015 arg "math-insert \\font"
26018 , or enter its command, listed in table
26019 \begin_inset space ~
26023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26025 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26032 \begin_layout Standard
26033 \begin_inset Float table
26038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26039 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26044 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26048 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26058 \begin_inset Tabular
26059 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26060 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26094 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26121 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26181 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26208 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26235 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26269 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26296 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26330 \begin_layout Standard
26331 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26339 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26355 \begin_layout Standard
26356 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26357 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26362 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26363 space when you need a space in the box.
26364 Here is an example where
26365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26376 denotes the set of numbers:
26377 \begin_inset Formula
26379 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26387 \begin_layout Standard
26388 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26389 You can, for example, put a character in
26398 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26402 \begin_inset Newline newline
26405 So it is better not to use this feature.
26408 \begin_layout Standard
26409 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26410 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26414 \begin_inset Newline newline
26417 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26423 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26424 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26430 \begin_layout Standard
26437 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26440 \begin_layout Standard
26441 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26444 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26446 \begin_inset space ~
26454 \begin_layout Subsection
26456 \begin_inset Index idx
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26468 \begin_layout Standard
26469 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26471 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26475 \begin_inset space ~
26479 \begin_inset space ~
26487 \begin_inset space ~
26495 arg "math-insert \\font"
26499 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26500 in black instead of blue.
26501 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26502 Here is an example:
26503 \begin_inset Formula
26506 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26507 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26516 \begin_layout Subsection
26518 \begin_inset Index idx
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 \begin_layout Standard
26531 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26532 automatically chosen in most situations.
26550 For most characters,
26558 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26559 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26564 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26565 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26566 thinks are appropriate.
26567 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26570 arg "math-insert \\style"
26574 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26575 For example, you can set
26576 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26579 , which is normally in
26588 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26592 The four styles are used in the following example:
26595 \begin_layout Standard
26596 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26600 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26604 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26608 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26616 is set in a particular size with the menu
26618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26620 \begin_inset space ~
26625 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26626 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26627 will be adjusted to correspond.
26628 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26639 \begin_layout Standard
26643 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26649 \begin_layout Section
26650 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26652 \begin_inset Index idx
26655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26662 \begin_inset Index idx
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26674 \begin_layout Standard
26676 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26677 that are in common use.
26680 \begin_layout Subsection
26681 Enabling AMS-Support
26684 \begin_layout Standard
26685 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26686 the document by selecting the checkbox
26689 \begin_inset space ~
26693 \begin_inset space ~
26697 \begin_inset space ~
26704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26708 \begin_inset Index idx
26711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26712 Document ! Settings
26720 \begin_inset space ~
26726 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26727 -errors in formulas,
26728 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26731 \begin_layout Subsection
26733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26735 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26740 \begin_inset Index idx
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26752 \begin_layout Standard
26753 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26754 provides a selection of different formula types.
26756 allows you to choose between
26777 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26778 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26785 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26788 \begin_layout Chapter
26792 \begin_layout Section
26794 \begin_inset Index idx
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26806 name "sec:Cross-References"
26813 \begin_layout Standard
26814 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26815 's strengths is cross-references.
26816 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26818 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26819 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26820 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26823 \begin_layout Enumerate
26827 \begin_layout Enumerate
26828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26830 name "enu:Second-item"
26837 \begin_layout Enumerate
26841 \begin_layout Standard
26842 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26844 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26847 or by pressing the toolbar button
26854 A gray label box like this:
26855 \begin_inset Graphics
26856 filename clipart/label.png
26860 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26862 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26897 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26898 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26914 \begin_layout Standard
26915 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26920 or the toolbar button
26923 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26927 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26928 \begin_inset Graphics
26929 filename clipart/reference.png
26933 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26935 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26948 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26952 \begin_layout Standard
26953 As an alternative to
26955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26958 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26963 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26964 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26966 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26978 \begin_layout Standard
26979 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26980 \begin_inset space ~
26984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26986 reference "enu:Second-item"
26993 \begin_layout Standard
26994 It is recommended to use a protected space
26998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26999 described in section
27000 \begin_inset space ~
27004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27006 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27015 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27016 line breaks between them.
27019 \begin_layout Standard
27020 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27023 \begin_layout Description
27024 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27027 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27034 \begin_layout Description
27035 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27036 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27048 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27055 \begin_layout Description
27056 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27057 \begin_inset space ~
27061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27062 LatexCommand pageref
27063 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27070 \begin_layout Description
27072 \begin_inset space ~
27076 \begin_inset space ~
27079 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27081 LatexCommand vpageref
27082 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27087 \begin_inset Newline newline
27090 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27091 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27092 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27093 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27094 it prints “on the next page”.
27095 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27098 \begin_layout Description
27100 \begin_inset space ~
27104 \begin_inset space ~
27108 \begin_inset space ~
27111 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27112 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27114 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27119 \begin_inset Newline newline
27122 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27128 ; otherwise it behaves like
27132 \begin_inset space ~
27136 \begin_inset space ~
27145 \begin_layout Description
27147 \begin_inset space ~
27150 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27151 \begin_inset Newline newline
27155 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27163 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27173 \begin_inset Index idx
27176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27178 -packages ! prettyref
27184 \begin_inset Index idx
27187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27189 -packages ! refstyle
27200 \begin_inset Newline newline
27203 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27204 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27207 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27211 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27212 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27220 is the default and preferred because
27224 supports only English documents.
27225 The format is specified by using the command
27237 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27238 preamble of the document.
27239 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27257 \begin_inset Newline newline
27264 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27269 \begin_inset Newline newline
27280 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27281 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27283 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27284 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27289 , you might do so as follows:
27290 \begin_inset Newline newline
27297 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27302 \begin_inset Newline newline
27305 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27306 the package documentation
27307 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27309 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27315 \begin_inset Newline newline
27326 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27333 \begin_layout Description
27335 \begin_inset space ~
27338 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27340 LatexCommand nameref
27341 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27348 \begin_layout Description
27350 \begin_inset space ~
27353 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27354 label for the reference:
27355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27356 LatexCommand labelonly
27357 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27362 \begin_inset Newline newline
27365 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27366 Code, if you want to issue a command
27367 that \SpecialChar LyX
27373 , then you may want to use the
27376 \begin_inset space ~
27381 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27391 This is the form needed for e.
27392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27396 \begin_inset space \space{}
27403 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27404 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27406 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27410 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27414 \begin_layout Standard
27415 You can only use the style
27419 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27423 is always possible.
27426 \begin_layout Standard
27427 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27428 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27430 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27431 \begin_inset space ~
27435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27437 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27444 \begin_layout Standard
27445 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27449 \begin_inset space ~
27453 \begin_inset space ~
27458 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27459 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27462 \begin_inset space ~
27467 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27468 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27471 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27477 \begin_layout Standard
27478 You can change labels at any time.
27479 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27480 do not need to think about this.
27483 \begin_layout Standard
27484 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27486 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27490 \begin_layout Standard
27491 References are described in detail in the section
27492 \begin_inset space ~
27502 \begin_inset space ~
27510 \begin_layout Section
27511 Table of Contents and other Listings
27512 \begin_inset Index idx
27515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27522 \begin_inset Index idx
27525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27526 Navigating ! Outline
27532 \begin_inset Index idx
27535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27551 \begin_layout Subsection
27553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27555 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27562 \begin_layout Standard
27563 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27566 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27568 \begin_inset space ~
27572 \begin_inset space ~
27578 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27580 If you click on it, the
27584 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27585 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27586 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27588 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27590 \begin_inset space ~
27595 that is described in section
27596 \begin_inset space ~
27600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27602 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27609 \begin_layout Standard
27610 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27611 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27613 \begin_inset space ~
27617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27619 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27623 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27625 \begin_inset space ~
27629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27631 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27635 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27637 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27640 \begin_layout Subsection
27641 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27644 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27651 \begin_layout Standard
27652 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27654 You can insert them via the
27656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27660 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27663 \begin_layout Section
27664 URLs and Hyperlinks
27665 \begin_inset Index idx
27668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27675 \begin_inset Index idx
27678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27687 \begin_layout Subsection
27689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27698 \begin_layout Standard
27699 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
27701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27707 \begin_layout Standard
27708 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
27710 \begin_inset Flex URL
27713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27723 \begin_layout Standard
27724 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
27730 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
27734 \begin_layout Standard
27735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27743 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27752 \begin_layout Subsection
27754 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27756 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
27763 \begin_layout Standard
27764 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
27766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27769 or with the toolbar button
27776 The appearing dialog has two fields:
27785 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
27786 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
27787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27789 name "LyX's homepage"
27790 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27795 , an Email address like this:
27796 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27798 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
27799 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
27805 , or a link to a file.
27808 \begin_layout Standard
27809 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
27811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27822 to the link target.
27825 \begin_layout Standard
27826 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27827 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27828 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27829 the text style dialog.
27830 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27836 name "LyX's homepage"
27837 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27845 \begin_layout Standard
27846 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27850 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27852 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27853 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27857 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27859 \begin_inset Newline newline
27867 \begin_inset Newline newline
27874 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27877 \begin_layout Section
27879 \begin_inset Index idx
27882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27891 name "sec:Appendices"
27898 \begin_layout Standard
27899 Appendices are created with the menu
27901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27903 \begin_inset space ~
27907 \begin_inset space ~
27913 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27914 as the appendix part of the book.
27915 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27918 \begin_layout Standard
27919 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27920 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27921 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27922 and the subsection number.
27923 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27927 \begin_layout Standard
27929 \begin_inset space ~
27933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27935 reference "chap:Credits"
27940 \begin_inset space ~
27944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27946 reference "subsec:Export"
27953 \begin_layout Section
27955 \begin_inset Index idx
27958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27967 name "sec:Bibliography"
27974 \begin_layout Standard
27975 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27977 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
27978 \begin_inset space ~
27982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27984 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27991 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
27996 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
27997 \begin_inset space ~
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28003 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28008 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28010 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28012 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28015 author-year citations,
28016 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28017 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28020 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28022 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28023 should seriously consider
28030 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28032 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28035 a bibliography database.
28036 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28040 \begin_layout Standard
28042 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28043 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28044 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28048 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28049 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28050 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28051 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28052 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28057 \begin_layout Subsection
28058 The Bibliography Environment
28059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28061 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28068 \begin_layout Standard
28073 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28075 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28084 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28087 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28088 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28089 of ASCII characters only.
28092 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28102 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28103 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28107 \begin_layout Standard
28108 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28113 or the toolbar button
28116 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28120 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28121 containing the available citations.
28122 Select one or more keys from the list and
28132 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28133 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28137 \begin_layout Standard
28138 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28139 entry with surrounding brackets.
28144 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28145 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28157 \begin_layout Standard
28161 Companion Second Edition
28164 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28166 key "latexcompanion"
28174 \begin_layout Standard
28175 The \SpecialChar LyX
28176 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28177 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28185 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28189 \begin_layout Standard
28191 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28192 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28197 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28209 Author A and Author B(Year)
28210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28217 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28219 Then, if you select
28225 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28229 \begin_inset Index idx
28232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28234 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28235 Document ! Settings
28242 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28248 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28255 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28260 \begin_layout Standard
28261 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28266 \begin_inset space ~
28274 arg "layout-paragraph"
28278 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28281 \begin_layout Subsection
28282 Bibliography databases
28283 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28284 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28288 \begin_inset Index idx
28291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28292 Bibliography ! Databases
28298 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28300 \begin_inset Index idx
28303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28304 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28315 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28322 \begin_layout Standard
28323 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28324 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28326 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28329 in different documents.
28333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28334 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28336 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28337 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28342 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28344 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28345 your working field in a database.
28346 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28347 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28348 list for that document.
28349 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28353 \begin_layout Standard
28354 The database is a text file with the file extension
28355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28366 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28367 The format is explained in
28368 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28375 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28377 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28379 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28385 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28386 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28387 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28389 \begin_inset Flex URL
28392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28394 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28400 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28404 \begin_layout Standard
28406 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28408 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28409 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28410 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28412 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28413 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28414 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28416 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28425 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28426 (although it has been significantly
28427 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28434 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28439 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28440 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28441 might conversely fail to correctly
28442 handle databases that use specific
28453 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28457 \begin_layout Standard
28459 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28460 Both approaches are described in turn.
28463 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28465 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28466 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28468 \begin_inset Index idx
28471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28473 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28474 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28485 \begin_layout Standard
28487 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28489 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28493 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28494 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28499 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28504 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28506 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28510 \begin_inset space ~
28516 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28517 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28518 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28519 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28529 Add bibliography to TOC
28531 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28536 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28537 in the document or just the cited references.
28540 \begin_layout Standard
28542 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28543 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28546 style file is a text file with the file extension
28547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28558 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28559 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28560 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28561 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28563 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28569 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28570 \begin_inset Newline newline
28574 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28576 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28587 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28588 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28593 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28599 \begin_layout Standard
28600 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28601 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
28605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28607 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
28609 \begin_inset Index idx
28612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28614 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
28615 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28623 \begin_layout Standard
28625 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
28626 Accessing a database via
28630 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28633 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28638 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28640 \begin_inset space ~
28646 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28647 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28649 you cannot select a
28653 file (we will explain later, why).
28654 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28657 Add bibliography to TOC
28659 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28664 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28665 in the document or just the cited references.
28668 \begin_layout Standard
28670 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
28675 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
28677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28688 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
28690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28701 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
28702 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
28703 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
28704 bibliography style.
28707 \begin_layout Standard
28709 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
28714 styles are not set in the
28717 \begin_inset space ~
28728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28729 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28733 However, in the former dialog (in the
28737 field which is only visible if you use
28741 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
28742 (for instance concerning its heading).
28743 These options are detailed in the
28748 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28760 \begin_layout Standard
28762 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
28763 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
28764 \begin_inset space ~
28768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28770 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28782 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
28783 Bibliography Processors
28786 \begin_layout Standard
28787 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
28789 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
28790 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
28791 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
28796 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
28798 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
28802 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
28808 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
28809 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
28813 \begin_layout Standard
28815 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
28816 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
28818 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
28819 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
28820 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28825 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
28826 do this on a general level in
28828 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28829 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28830 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28833 , or for individual documents
28834 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
28835 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
28844 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28845 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28847 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
28852 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
28853 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
28854 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
28860 The following variants are
28861 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
28863 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
28864 available by default
28869 \begin_layout Description
28871 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
28872 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
28876 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28884 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
28885 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
28886 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
28887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28891 \begin_inset space \space{}
28898 ), only with the package
28901 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
28904 and many specific features
28911 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
28912 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
28914 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
28919 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
28928 \begin_layout Description
28929 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
28930 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
28931 with all bibliography packages,
28932 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
28934 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
28938 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
28939 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
28940 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
28942 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
28948 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
28951 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
28956 \begin_layout Description
28957 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
28958 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
28959 (but no Unicode support)
28961 , larger memory than
28965 , works with all bibliography packages
28966 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
28967 , although more complex
28971 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
28975 features are supported.
28978 \begin_layout Standard
28980 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
28982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28989 bibliography processor set in
28991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28992 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29003 bibliography processor in
29005 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29006 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29007 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29010 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29011 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29020 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29021 -based bibliography styles).
29022 This should suit most needs.
29027 \begin_layout Standard
29029 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29030 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29031 By default, this is
29039 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29040 You can adjust it in
29042 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29043 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29044 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29052 \begin_layout Standard
29054 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29055 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29057 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29058 Selected bibliography processors
29060 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29061 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29062 specification of the variants
29063 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29067 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29069 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29073 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29076 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29078 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29084 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29086 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29094 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29106 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29112 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29118 \begin_layout Standard
29120 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29122 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29125 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29126 When you select the option
29128 Sectioned bibliography
29132 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29133 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29136 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29140 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29142 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29146 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29150 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29153 are explained in detail in section
29155 Customizing Bibliographies
29159 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29161 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054457
29168 Additional Features
29173 \begin_layout Standard
29175 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29176 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29177 the two methods of creating them.
29178 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29179 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29180 We used the style file
29184 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29189 \begin_layout Subsection
29191 \begin_inset Index idx
29194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29195 Bibliography ! Citation format
29201 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29205 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29214 \begin_layout Standard
29216 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29217 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29222 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29231 ) or author-year citations (as
29232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29241 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29245 \begin_layout Standard
29247 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29248 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29251 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29255 \begin_inset Index idx
29258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29260 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29261 Document ! Settings
29268 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29271 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29272 bibliography approach.
29275 \begin_layout Standard
29277 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29282 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29287 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29291 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29298 \begin_layout Standard
29300 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29301 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29309 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29317 Currently, the following options are available:
29320 \begin_layout Itemize
29322 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29329 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29333 \begin_layout Itemize
29335 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29344 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29346 Biblatex citation style
29350 Biblatex bibliography style
29353 Many different style variants are supported.
29358 package can be entered in the
29365 \begin_layout Itemize
29367 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29370 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29380 natbib compatibility mode
29381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29385 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29390 (see below) or want to emulate
29394 behavior very closely.
29399 , this option has some additional styles.
29400 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29405 styles are also supported by this variant.
29408 \begin_layout Itemize
29410 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29419 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29422 \begin_layout Itemize
29424 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29433 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29438 \begin_layout Standard
29440 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29449 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29451 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29456 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29458 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29459 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29476 , a suitable style is proposed).
29481 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29485 \begin_layout Standard
29487 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29488 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29490 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29492 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29495 n the citation reference dialog
29496 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29497 you can set a special citation format
29501 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29502 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29503 a name prefix such as
29504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29519 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29523 e., use or don't use
29524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29533 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29534 For this feature you need to enable the option
29540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29544 \begin_inset Index idx
29547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29548 Document ! Settings
29558 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29559 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29560 style files as explained in
29561 the previous section.
29566 \begin_layout Standard
29568 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29569 In the citation dialog,
29570 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29572 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29575 ou can also set text to appear
29576 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29579 after a citation reference,
29580 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29581 in the citation reference window
29582 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29584 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29588 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29590 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29606 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
29608 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
29611 example where the text
29612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29616 \begin_inset space ~
29620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29623 appears after the reference:
29626 \begin_layout Quote
29628 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29631 key "latexcompanion"
29637 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
29641 \begin_layout Standard
29643 \change_inserted -712698321 1501054733
29644 All styles except for
29648 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
29649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29657 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29661 \begin_layout Standard
29663 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
29664 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29665 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
29666 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
29672 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
29673 in a multi-citation (so-called
29674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29677 qualified citation lists
29678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29684 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
29686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29693 window will display three columns:
29694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29718 If you double-click on an item's
29719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29734 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29739 General text before
29740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29751 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29756 \begin_layout Section
29758 \begin_inset Index idx
29761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29777 \begin_layout Standard
29778 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29782 \begin_inset space ~
29787 or the toolbar button
29794 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29795 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29796 by \SpecialChar LyX
29797 as the index entry.
29800 \begin_layout Standard
29801 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29803 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29804 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29806 \begin_inset space ~
29812 A light blue box labeled
29813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29824 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29825 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29829 \begin_layout Standard
29830 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29831 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29832 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29833 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29835 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29837 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29845 \begin_layout Subsection
29846 Grouping Index Entries
29847 \begin_inset Index idx
29850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29859 \begin_layout Standard
29860 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29862 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29863 lists under the entry
29864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29872 First we create the entry
29873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29881 \begin_inset space ~
29885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29887 reference "subsec:Lists"
29892 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29893 \begin_inset space ~
29897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29899 reference "sec:Itemize"
29903 , we insert the command
29906 \begin_layout Standard
29912 \begin_layout Standard
29916 \begin_layout Standard
29922 \begin_layout Standard
29923 for the enumerated list in section
29924 \begin_inset space ~
29928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29930 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29937 \begin_layout Standard
29938 The exclamation mark
29939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29946 marks the grouping levels.
29947 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29948 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29949 If we don't have an index entry for
29950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29957 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29960 \begin_layout Subsection
29962 \begin_inset Index idx
29965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29966 Index ! Page ranges
29974 \begin_layout Standard
29975 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
29977 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
29978 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
29979 an index entry in section
29980 \begin_inset space ~
29984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29986 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
29993 \begin_layout Standard
29996 Paragraph environments|(
29999 \begin_layout Standard
30000 and another entry at the end of section
30001 \begin_inset space ~
30005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30007 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30014 \begin_layout Standard
30017 Paragraph environments|)
30020 \begin_layout Standard
30022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30045 respectively start and end the index range.
30046 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30047 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30048 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30049 An example is the index entry
30050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30053 Document ! Settings
30054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30060 \begin_layout Subsection
30062 \begin_inset Index idx
30065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30066 Index ! Cross referencing
30074 \begin_layout Standard
30075 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30076 We referred for example in the index entry
30077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30085 \begin_inset space ~
30089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30091 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30095 ) to the index entry
30096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30103 in the same section using the entry
30106 \begin_layout Standard
30109 GIF|see{Image formats}
30112 \begin_layout Standard
30113 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30115 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30116 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30119 \begin_layout Subsection
30121 \begin_inset Index idx
30124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30125 Index ! Entry order
30133 \begin_layout Standard
30134 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30135 follow the rules for the index order.
30136 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30142 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30144 \begin_inset space ~
30148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30150 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30159 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30160 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30185 \begin_inset Index idx
30188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30189 Dummy entries ! maïs
30195 \begin_inset Index idx
30198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30199 Dummy entries ! maître
30205 \begin_inset Index idx
30208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30209 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30214 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30215 maïs, maison, maître.
30216 To achieve this, we use the command
30219 \begin_layout Standard
30222 previous entry@current entry
30225 \begin_layout Standard
30226 In our case we want to have
30227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30242 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30245 \begin_layout Standard
30251 \begin_layout Standard
30252 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30253 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30255 See the next subsection for an example.
30258 \begin_layout Standard
30259 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30265 \begin_layout Standard
30266 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30271 to generate the index (see section
30272 \begin_inset space ~
30276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30278 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30287 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30288 -package aeguill in section
30289 \begin_inset space ~
30293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30295 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30299 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30300 -packages although all these index
30301 commands start with
30302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30315 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30320 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30323 \begin_layout Standard
30335 \begin_layout Standard
30347 \begin_layout Subsection
30349 \begin_inset Index idx
30352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30353 Index ! Entry layout
30361 \begin_layout Standard
30362 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30363 \begin_inset Index idx
30366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30369 This is an italic dummy entry
30374 You can also format the page number using the character
30375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30382 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30383 -command without a backslash.
30384 We can write for example
30387 \begin_layout Standard
30390 italic page number:|textit
30393 \begin_layout Standard
30394 to get the page number in italic.
30395 \begin_inset Index idx
30398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30399 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30404 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30405 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30423 \begin_inset space ~
30429 Have a look at section
30430 \begin_inset space ~
30434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30436 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30440 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30445 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30453 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30457 to generate the index, see section
30458 \begin_inset space ~
30462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30464 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30473 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30478 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30482 key "latexcompanion"
30495 \begin_layout Standard
30496 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30498 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30499 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30500 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30501 If so, put the following in the preamble
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30516 \begin_layout Standard
30520 \begin_layout Standard
30526 \begin_layout Standard
30527 in the index entry.
30528 \begin_inset Index idx
30531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30532 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30537 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30538 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30539 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30542 \begin_layout Standard
30543 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30544 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30545 a bold font for all index entries.
30546 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30558 documentation for details,
30559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30561 key "makeindex,xindy"
30569 \begin_layout Subsection
30571 \begin_inset Index idx
30574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30583 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30590 \begin_layout Standard
30591 If the index generation program
30595 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30596 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30600 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30601 distribution, is used.
30605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30611 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30612 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30613 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30614 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30624 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30626 dialog, see section
30627 \begin_inset space ~
30631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30633 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30638 The available options are listed and explained in
30639 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30641 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30647 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30651 \begin_layout Standard
30652 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30653 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30656 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30657 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30661 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30662 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30665 \begin_layout Subsection
30669 \begin_layout Standard
30670 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30671 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30679 next to the standard index.
30681 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30682 that add this feature.
30689 \begin_inset Index idx
30692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 -packages ! splitidx
30699 package to generate multiple indexes.
30700 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30706 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30708 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30716 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30717 style, but it also includes
30718 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30719 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30727 \begin_layout Standard
30728 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30729 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30731 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30732 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30735 and select the option
30737 Use multiple Indexes
30744 already contains the standard index
30745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30753 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30754 also appear as a heading) to the
30758 input field and press the
30763 The new index now also appears in the list.
30764 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30765 label color to the new index.
30768 \begin_layout Standard
30769 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30779 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30780 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30781 are additional features:
30784 \begin_layout Itemize
30785 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30786 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30789 \begin_layout Itemize
30790 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30791 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30799 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30800 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30801 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30802 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30805 \begin_layout Section
30806 Nomenclature/Glossary
30807 \begin_inset Index idx
30810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30817 \begin_inset Index idx
30820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30851 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30858 \begin_layout Standard
30859 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30860 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30861 called nomenclature or glossary.
30864 \begin_layout Standard
30865 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30872 \begin_inset Index idx
30875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30877 -packages ! nomencl
30883 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30885 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30892 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30896 \begin_layout Standard
30897 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30898 and then use the menu
30900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30906 \begin_inset space ~
30911 or the toolbar button
30914 arg "nomencl-insert"
30919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30930 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30933 \begin_layout Standard
30934 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30935 The first is the term or
30939 that you wish to define.
30944 of the term or symbol.
30947 \begin_layout Standard
30948 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30956 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30957 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30965 \begin_layout Subsection
30966 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30967 \begin_inset Index idx
30970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30971 Nomenclature ! Layout
30979 \begin_layout Standard
30980 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
30984 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
30987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30991 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
30995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30999 \begin_inset Newline newline
31007 \begin_inset Newline newline
31013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31020 character starts/ends the formula.
31021 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31022 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31034 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31044 \begin_layout Standard
31045 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31046 -syntax is given in section
31047 \begin_inset space ~
31051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31053 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31060 \begin_layout Standard
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31069 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31071 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31076 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31083 in this document is:
31084 \begin_inset Newline newline
31089 dummy entry for the character
31094 \begin_inset Newline newline
31106 \begin_inset space ~
31116 font use the command
31145 \begin_layout Standard
31146 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31151 \begin_inset space \space{}
31155 \begin_inset Newline newline
31171 \begin_inset Newline newline
31174 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31175 This command will make the font of all symbols
31182 \begin_inset space ~
31190 \begin_layout Standard
31191 If the characters |
31192 \begin_inset space \space{}
31196 \begin_inset space \space{}
31200 \begin_inset space \space{}
31204 \begin_inset space \space{}
31208 \begin_inset space \space{}
31211 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31212 a quote character in front of them.
31213 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31214 LatexCommand nomenclature
31215 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31216 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31224 \begin_layout Subsection
31225 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31226 \begin_inset Index idx
31229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31230 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31238 \begin_layout Standard
31239 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31240 -code of the symbol
31242 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31244 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31247 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31248 LatexCommand nomenclature
31250 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31258 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31262 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31263 LatexCommand nomenclature
31266 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31272 They will be sorted by
31273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31299 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31302 will be sorted before the
31306 since the character
31307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31314 is considered in sorting.
31317 \begin_layout Standard
31318 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31321 \begin_inset space ~
31326 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31327 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31329 For the example given, you can insert
31333 in this field for the
31334 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31341 will be located before
31342 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31348 \begin_layout Standard
31349 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31354 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31364 \begin_layout Subsection
31365 Nomenclature Options
31366 \begin_inset Index idx
31369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31370 Nomenclature ! Options
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31383 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31384 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31387 \begin_layout Description
31388 refeq Appends the phrase
31389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31404 to every nomenclature entry, where
31410 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31413 \begin_layout Description
31414 refpage Appends the phrase
31415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31430 to every nomenclature entry, where
31436 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31439 \begin_layout Description
31440 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31443 \begin_layout Standard
31444 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31445 class options list in the
31447 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31451 In this document the options
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31459 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31465 \begin_layout Standard
31466 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31467 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31472 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31475 \begin_layout Description
31485 \begin_layout Description
31488 nomrefpage Like the
31495 \begin_layout Description
31498 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31507 \begin_layout Description
31511 \begin_inset space ~
31517 \begin_inset space ~
31522 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31525 \begin_layout Standard
31527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31534 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31535 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31547 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31550 \begin_inset Newline newline
31557 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31562 \begin_inset Newline newline
31566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31581 by their translation.
31584 \begin_layout Subsection
31585 Printing the Nomenclature
31586 \begin_inset Index idx
31589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31590 Nomenclature ! Printing
31598 \begin_layout Standard
31599 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31602 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31618 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31619 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31620 You can choose between these settings:
31623 \begin_layout Description
31624 Default a space of 1
31625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31631 \begin_layout Description
31633 \begin_inset space ~
31637 \begin_inset space ~
31640 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31643 \begin_layout Description
31644 Custom custom space
31647 \begin_layout Standard
31648 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31657 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31665 For example, in order to change the name to
31669 , add the following line to the preamble:
31672 \begin_layout Standard
31680 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31683 \begin_layout Subsection
31684 Nomenclature Program
31685 \begin_inset Index idx
31688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31689 Nomenclature ! Program
31695 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31697 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31704 \begin_layout Standard
31710 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31711 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31713 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31718 by adding options, see section
31719 \begin_inset space ~
31723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31725 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31730 The available options are listed and explained in
31731 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31733 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31741 \begin_layout Section
31743 \begin_inset Index idx
31746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31753 \begin_inset Index idx
31756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31757 Document ! Branches
31763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31765 name "sec:Branches"
31772 \begin_layout Standard
31773 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31774 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31775 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31776 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31779 \begin_layout Standard
31780 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31781 allows you to put text into branches.
31782 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31783 To create a branch, either select the menu
31785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31786 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31789 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31798 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31799 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31800 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31801 and whether the name of the branch should
31802 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31803 (see below for an example).
31804 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31805 to the name of the other) and to add
31806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31818 \begin_inset space ~
31821 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31822 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31825 \begin_layout Standard
31826 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31827 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31832 where you can choose a branch.
31833 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31837 \begin_layout Standard
31838 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31839 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31843 \begin_inset Branch Question
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31852 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31860 \begin_layout Standard
31861 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31865 \begin_layout Standard
31870 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31878 \begin_layout Standard
31885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31889 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31890 Consider for example a file
31891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31898 which has the above branches.
31900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31907 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31931 branch were inactive,
31932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31947 branch was active, likewise
31948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31963 branch was active, and
31964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31967 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31971 if both branches were active.
31972 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
31973 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31979 \begin_layout Standard
31980 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
31986 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
31987 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
31991 \begin_inset space ~
31999 \begin_layout Standard
32000 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32004 \begin_layout Standard
32010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32017 branch is deactivated.
32023 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32030 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32031 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32032 definitions for each branch.
32033 For example you can define for the question branch
32037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32038 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32039 -syntax, see section
32040 \begin_inset space ~
32044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32046 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32058 \begin_layout Standard
32068 \begin_layout Standard
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32079 and for the answer branch
32082 \begin_layout Standard
32092 \begin_layout Standard
32102 \begin_layout Standard
32103 \begin_inset Branch Question
32107 \begin_layout Standard
32111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32139 \begin_layout Standard
32140 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32144 \begin_layout Standard
32148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32176 \begin_layout Standard
32177 Now it is possible to use the
32181 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32188 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32191 commands to obtain conditional output.
32192 Here is an example formula where only the
32199 \begin_inset Formula
32201 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32209 \begin_layout Standard
32210 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32225 \begin_inset space \space{}
32228 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32230 For this advanced usage, see the
32236 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32241 \begin_layout Section
32243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32245 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32250 \begin_inset Index idx
32253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32262 \begin_layout Standard
32265 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32266 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32269 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32271 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32277 \begin_inset Index idx
32280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32282 -packages ! hyperref
32287 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32288 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32289 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32290 part of the document.
32294 \begin_layout Standard
32295 The header information in the dialog tab
32299 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32300 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32301 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32302 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32306 \begin_inset space ~
32310 \begin_inset space ~
32315 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32316 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32317 and author entries.
32321 \begin_inset space ~
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32329 \begin_inset space ~
32334 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32337 \begin_layout Standard
32338 You can specify in the dialog tab
32342 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32347 \begin_inset space ~
32351 \begin_inset space ~
32355 \begin_inset space ~
32360 option allows long links to be split;
32363 \begin_inset space ~
32367 \begin_inset space ~
32371 \begin_inset space ~
32379 \begin_inset space ~
32384 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32387 \begin_inset space ~
32392 colors the different links.
32393 The default colors are:
32396 \begin_layout Labeling
32397 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32402 for hyperlinks and URLs
32405 \begin_layout Labeling
32406 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32414 \begin_layout Labeling
32415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32423 \begin_layout Standard
32424 but you can change these in the field
32429 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32435 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32438 \begin_layout Standard
32443 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32444 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32445 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32448 \begin_layout Standard
32453 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32454 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32455 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32465 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32466 when opening the PDF.
32468 \begin_inset space ~
32471 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32472 \begin_inset space ~
32475 1 will only display the sections.
32478 \begin_layout Standard
32479 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32480 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32486 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32487 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32497 \begin_layout Section
32499 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32503 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32510 \begin_layout Subsection
32513 \begin_inset Index idx
32516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32526 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32533 \begin_layout Standard
32534 As \SpecialChar LyX
32535 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32536 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32537 commands and constructs,
32540 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32541 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32542 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32543 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32544 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32545 cannot support all packages and
32549 \begin_layout Standard
32550 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32551 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32552 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32556 Code box is created by the menu
32558 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32565 or by the toolbar button
32578 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32586 \begin_layout Standard
32587 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32589 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32591 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32596 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32601 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32608 , you can write the command part
32614 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32615 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32619 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32620 Code box behind the word.
32621 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32622 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32626 \begin_layout Standard
32627 \begin_inset Graphics
32628 filename clipart/ERT.png
32636 \begin_layout Standard
32640 \begin_layout Standard
32641 This is a line with a
32645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32668 \begin_layout Standard
32669 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32677 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32678 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32679 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32680 know that the command is finished.
32688 \begin_layout Subsection
32689 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32691 \begin_inset Argument 1
32694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32695 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32702 \begin_inset Index idx
32705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32715 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32722 \begin_layout Standard
32723 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32724 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32725 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32726 uses in the background.
32727 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32728 is based on commands, you can
32729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32737 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32738 any time if you know the right commands.
32739 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32740 is the end of the day.
32741 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32742 all caption labels bold.
32743 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32745 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32749 \begin_layout Standard
32750 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32752 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32754 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32757 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32768 As result you find that the package
32773 \begin_inset Index idx
32776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32778 -packages ! caption
32784 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32789 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32793 \begin_inset space ~
32801 \begin_layout Standard
32806 usepackage[options]{package name}
32809 \begin_layout Standard
32810 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32811 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32812 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32813 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32816 \begin_layout Standard
32817 In your case the package name is
32822 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32827 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32828 So you add the command
32831 \begin_layout Standard
32836 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32839 \begin_layout Standard
32840 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32845 For more commands provided by the
32849 package, have a look at its documentation,
32850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32865 \begin_layout Standard
32866 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32868 For example if you use a
32872 class, you don't need the package
32876 , you can instead write
32879 \begin_layout Standard
32884 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32889 \begin_layout Standard
32890 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32891 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32892 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32899 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32902 \begin_layout Standard
32903 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32904 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32906 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32907 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32908 Code box as described in the previous
32912 \begin_layout Standard
32913 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32914 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32917 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32919 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32927 \begin_layout Standard
32928 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32934 \begin_layout Standard
32938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32948 \begin_inset Note Note
32951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32952 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32960 \begin_layout Left Header
32961 \begin_inset Argument 1
32964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32984 \begin_inset Note Note
32987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32988 defines the header line as described below
32996 \begin_layout Center Header
32997 \begin_inset Argument 1
33000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 \begin_layout Right Header
33010 \begin_inset Argument 1
33013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33034 \begin_layout Left Footer
33035 \begin_inset Argument 1
33038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33059 \begin_layout Center Footer
33060 \begin_inset Argument 1
33063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33075 \begin_inset Newline newline
33079 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33085 \begin_layout Right Footer
33086 \begin_inset Argument 1
33089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33111 \begin_layout Section
33112 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33115 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33120 \begin_inset Index idx
33123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33124 Document ! Header/Footer line
33130 \begin_inset Index idx
33133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33143 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33147 \begin_inset space ~
33158 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33164 \begin_inset space ~
33170 As a second step add in the menu
33172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33173 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33182 Custom Header/Footerlines
33185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33189 This module offers the following 6
33190 \begin_inset space ~
33196 \begin_layout Description
33198 \begin_inset space ~
33202 \begin_inset space ~
33206 \begin_inset space ~
33210 \begin_inset space ~
33214 \begin_inset space ~
33220 \begin_layout Description
33222 \begin_inset space ~
33226 \begin_inset space ~
33230 \begin_inset space ~
33234 \begin_inset space ~
33238 \begin_inset space ~
33244 \begin_layout Standard
33245 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33246 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33249 \begin_layout Standard
33250 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33251 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33253 \begin_inset space ~
33257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33259 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33263 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33266 \begin_layout Standard
33267 \begin_inset Float figure
33273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33276 \begin_inset Tabular
33277 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33278 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33279 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33280 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33281 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33283 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33301 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33312 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33330 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33341 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33345 The normal text on the page goes here.
33346 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33348 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33349 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33354 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33363 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33392 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33403 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33421 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33439 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33444 name "fig:Page-layout"
33448 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33461 \begin_layout Standard
33462 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33470 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33474 \begin_inset space ~
33479 is set to “Default”.
33480 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33489 \begin_layout Subsection
33493 \begin_layout Standard
33494 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33495 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33496 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33497 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33499 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33501 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33504 \begin_layout Standard
33505 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33506 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33512 \begin_inset space ~
33520 \begin_layout Description
33523 thepage prints the current page number
33526 \begin_layout Description
33529 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33532 \begin_layout Description
33535 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33538 \begin_layout Description
33541 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33542 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33549 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33552 because it usually goes in a left header.
33555 \begin_layout Description
33558 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33559 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33561 It is normally used in the right header.
33564 \begin_layout Subsection
33565 Default header/footer
33568 \begin_layout Standard
33569 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33570 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33571 footer has the page number.
33572 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33573 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33574 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33577 \begin_inset space ~
33585 \begin_layout Subsection
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33590 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33591 Some pages are different.
33592 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33593 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33594 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33595 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33596 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33600 Header and footer decoration line
33603 \begin_layout Standard
33604 By default, you get a 0.4
33605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33608 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33609 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33621 in the following way:
33624 \begin_layout Standard
33631 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33634 \begin_layout Standard
33635 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33648 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33655 \begin_layout Standard
33656 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33658 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33659 \begin_inset space ~
33663 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33674 Several header/footer lines
33677 \begin_layout Standard
33678 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33679 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33680 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33682 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33698 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33700 \begin_inset space ~
33708 \begin_layout Standard
33715 headheight}{height}
33718 \begin_layout Standard
33723 is a size in standard units (e.
33724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33728 \begin_inset space \space{}
33736 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33737 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33738 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33739 logfile with the menu
33741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33743 \begin_inset space ~
33751 \begin_inset space ~
33756 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33761 \begin_inset Index idx
33764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33766 -packages ! fancyhdr
33772 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33773 for your header/footer.
33776 \begin_layout Subsection
33780 \begin_layout Standard
33781 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33782 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33783 This example consists of the following definition:
33786 \begin_layout Description
33788 \begin_inset space ~
33797 , empty optional argument
33800 \begin_layout Description
33802 \begin_inset space ~
33805 Header empty, empty optional argument
33808 \begin_layout Description
33810 \begin_inset space ~
33819 in the optional argument
33822 \begin_layout Description
33824 \begin_inset space ~
33833 in the optional argument
33836 \begin_layout Description
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33855 \begin_inset Newline newline
33859 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33866 in the optional argument
33869 \begin_layout Description
33871 \begin_inset space ~
33880 , empty optional argument
33883 \begin_layout Description
33886 headrulewidth set to 2
33887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33893 \begin_layout Standard
33894 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33895 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33901 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33911 \begin_layout Standard
33912 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33926 pagestyle{headings}
33932 \begin_inset Note Note
33935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33936 switches back to page style with the default headings
33944 \begin_layout Section
33945 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33948 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33953 \begin_inset Index idx
33956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33963 \begin_inset Index idx
33966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33975 \begin_layout Standard
33977 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
33978 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
33979 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
33982 \begin_layout Subsection
33986 \begin_layout Standard
33987 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33993 \begin_inset Index idx
33996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33998 -packages ! preview-latex
34003 (on some systems named simply
34008 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34017 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34019 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34027 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34028 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34029 -package are automatically
34030 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34034 \begin_layout Subsection
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34039 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34040 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34042 activate the option
34045 \begin_inset space ~
34052 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34062 \begin_inset space ~
34065 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34072 \begin_inset space ~
34085 \begin_inset space ~
34090 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34093 \begin_layout Standard
34094 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34099 \begin_inset space ~
34107 \begin_inset space ~
34115 \begin_layout Standard
34116 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34117 and when you finish
34121 \begin_layout Standard
34122 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34130 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34131 generated by activating the option
34134 \begin_inset space ~
34140 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34148 \begin_layout Subsection
34149 Selected document parts
34152 \begin_layout Standard
34153 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34154 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34155 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34156 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34158 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34164 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34165 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34166 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34169 \begin_layout Standard
34170 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34177 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34189 is explained in section
34191 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34196 \begin_inset space ~
34206 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34207 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34208 the final rotated boxes,
34209 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34210 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34212 Here is the result:
34215 \begin_layout Standard
34216 \begin_inset Preview
34218 \begin_layout Standard
34223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34227 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34233 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34243 height_special "totalheight"
34248 backgroundcolor "none"
34251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34276 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34282 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34304 \begin_layout Standard
34305 Previewing works also for colors.
34306 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34325 is explained in section
34332 \begin_inset space ~
34345 \begin_layout Standard
34346 \begin_inset Preview
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34371 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34376 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34395 \begin_layout Standard
34396 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34402 \begin_layout Standard
34403 If \SpecialChar LyX
34404 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34405 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34406 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34407 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34408 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34409 the \SpecialChar TeX
34411 If \SpecialChar LyX
34412 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34413 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34415 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34416 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34417 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34420 \begin_layout Subsection
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34427 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34430 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34432 \begin_inset space ~
34437 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34439 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34441 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34442 's main window, then only this selection
34443 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34444 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34445 the source view window.
34450 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34451 ; but note that if you have
34452 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34454 not just the one which is open at the time.
34457 \begin_layout Section
34458 Advanced Find and Replace
34459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34461 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34466 \begin_inset Index idx
34469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34476 \begin_inset Index idx
34479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34488 \begin_layout Subsection
34492 \begin_layout Standard
34493 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34494 allows for searching of complex,
34495 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34497 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34498 The key-features are:
34501 \begin_layout Itemize
34502 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34503 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34504 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34508 \begin_layout Itemize
34509 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34510 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34511 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34512 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34515 \begin_layout Itemize
34516 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34517 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34518 outside of mathematics environments
34521 \begin_layout Itemize
34522 Search may be widened to a specific
34527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34531 \begin_inset space ~
34534 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34535 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34542 \begin_layout Itemize
34543 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34544 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34549 \begin_inset space ~
34552 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34555 \begin_layout Subsection
34559 \begin_layout Standard
34560 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34562 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34575 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34578 ) or the toolbar button
34581 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34587 Advanced Find and Replace
34592 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34596 \begin_layout Standard
34602 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34606 \begin_inset space ~
34611 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34614 arg "paragraph-break"
34618 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34619 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34623 arg "paragraph-break"
34626 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34630 searches backwards.
34633 \begin_layout Standard
34637 \begin_inset space ~
34642 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34651 \begin_inset space ~
34656 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34659 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34660 Searching for mathematics
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34664 Mathematical formulas, such as
34665 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34668 or something more complex like
34669 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34672 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34677 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34678 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34679 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34680 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34690 \begin_layout Standard
34691 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34692 This is done by switching to the
34696 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34701 This way, entering in the
34708 \begin_layout Itemize
34709 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34710 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34713 \begin_layout Itemize
34714 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34715 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34718 \begin_layout Itemize
34719 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34720 of it only within section headings.
34721 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34722 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34726 \begin_layout Itemize
34727 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34728 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34735 \begin_layout Standard
34736 The entries made in the
34740 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34749 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34753 button or alternatively press
34756 arg "paragraph-break"
34763 while the cursor is in the
34766 \begin_inset space ~
34774 \begin_layout Standard
34775 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34777 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34781 \begin_layout Itemize
34782 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34783 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34791 with its typewriter version
34792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34806 \begin_layout Itemize
34807 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34813 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34825 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34832 (you may want to enable the
34835 \begin_inset space ~
34843 \begin_inset space ~
34848 options and disable the
34856 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34864 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34865 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34869 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34872 , or occurrences of
34873 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34877 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34883 \begin_layout Subsection
34887 \begin_layout Standard
34888 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34893 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34895 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34897 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34907 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34913 This is done with the context menu
34915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34916 Insert Regular Expression
34918 while the cursor is in the
34923 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34924 expression matching rules
34928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34929 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34936 \begin_inset space ~
34939 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34940 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34946 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34947 same text in the document.
34948 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34949 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34952 \begin_layout Enumerate
34953 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34958 editor the fraction
34959 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34963 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34966 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34967 fractions with the given denominator.
34970 \begin_layout Enumerate
34971 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
34983 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34988 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
34989 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
34990 Also, by inserting a
34991 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34994 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
34995 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
34998 \begin_layout Standard
34999 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35000 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35001 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35004 , and referring back to them through
35005 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35009 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35013 For example, try searching with the regexp
35014 \begin_inset Newline newline
35017 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35020 \begin_inset Newline newline
35023 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35026 \begin_layout Standard
35027 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35030 \begin_layout Standard
35031 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35039 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35040 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35041 sub-expressions is absolute.
35043 \begin_inset space ~
35047 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35050 always refers to the first occurrence of
35051 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35054 in all entered regexps.
35062 \begin_layout Section
35064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35066 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35071 \begin_inset Index idx
35074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35083 \begin_layout Standard
35085 has a built-in spell checker.
35088 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35095 key or the toolbar button
35098 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35101 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35102 beginning of the currently selected text.
35103 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35104 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35105 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35106 scrolled so that it is visible.
35107 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35108 n, if any could be found.
35109 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35113 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35114 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35118 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35125 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35126 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35128 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35129 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35132 \begin_inset space ~
35140 arg "dialog-show character"
35143 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35145 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35148 \begin_layout Standard
35149 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35150 can be downloaded from here:
35151 \begin_inset Newline newline
35155 \begin_inset Flex URL
35158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35160 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35166 \begin_inset Newline newline
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35173 files for each language.
35174 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35178 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35179 's installation subfolder
35187 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35189 \begin_inset Newline newline
35192 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35193 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35194 but in most cases these are
35210 is the language code.
35213 \begin_layout Subsection
35217 \begin_layout Standard
35220 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35221 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35223 \begin_inset space ~
35226 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35229 you can set the following things:
35232 \begin_layout Description
35234 \begin_inset space ~
35237 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35238 should use for spell checking.
35239 Depending on your platform,
35253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35254 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35255 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35270 \begin_inset space ~
35273 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35276 \begin_layout Description
35278 \begin_inset space ~
35281 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35282 will always use the given language
35283 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35286 \begin_layout Description
35288 \begin_inset space ~
35291 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35297 \begin_inset space \space{}
35301 This should normally not be needed.
35304 \begin_layout Description
35306 \begin_inset space ~
35310 \begin_inset space ~
35313 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35325 \begin_layout Description
35327 \begin_inset space ~
35330 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35331 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35332 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35333 appear in a context menu.
35334 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35338 \begin_layout Description
35340 \begin_inset space ~
35344 \begin_inset space ~
35348 \begin_inset space ~
35351 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35355 \begin_layout Section
35357 \begin_inset Index idx
35360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35369 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35376 \begin_layout Standard
35378 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35379 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35389 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35391 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35401 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35403 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35404 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35405 which are available for many languages.
35408 \begin_layout Standard
35409 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35410 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35414 \begin_layout Subsection
35415 Setting up the thesaurus
35418 \begin_layout Standard
35427 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35431 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35436 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35442 \begin_inset space ~
35450 For instance, the US English files are named:
35453 \begin_layout Itemize
35457 \begin_layout Itemize
35461 \begin_layout Standard
35470 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35471 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35475 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35476 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35478 \begin_inset space ~
35483 ) to the path where they are installed.
35487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35488 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35489 ies, typical locations are
35495 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35499 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35503 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35506 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35512 LibreOffice-<Version>
35519 On the Mac, the default location is
35521 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35522 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35523 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35524 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35525 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35526 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35534 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35535 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35536 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35540 \begin_layout Standard
35541 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35542 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35546 \begin_layout Itemize
35547 \begin_inset Flex URL
35550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35552 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35560 \begin_layout Standard
35561 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35562 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35564 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35565 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35566 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35568 \begin_inset space ~
35573 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35575 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35576 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35581 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35583 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35586 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35592 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35595 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35596 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35604 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35605 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35606 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35608 \begin_inset space ~
35613 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35616 \begin_layout Subsection
35617 Using the thesaurus
35620 \begin_layout Standard
35621 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35623 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35626 or the toolbar button
35629 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35632 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35634 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35636 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35637 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35638 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35647 ), related terms (such as
35650 \begin_inset space ~
35659 ), compounds (such as
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35671 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35680 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35683 \begin_layout Standard
35684 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35685 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35689 \begin_layout Standard
35690 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35691 the dictionary, such as the above
35695 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35700 \begin_inset space \space{}
35703 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35704 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35705 For example, looking up the word form
35709 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35714 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35719 \begin_inset space \space{}
35730 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35731 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35732 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35735 \begin_layout Section
35737 \begin_inset Index idx
35740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35747 \begin_inset Index idx
35750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35751 Document ! Change Tracking
35757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35759 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35766 \begin_layout Standard
35767 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35768 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35769 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35770 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35772 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35774 \begin_inset space ~
35777 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35779 \begin_inset space ~
35787 \begin_layout Standard
35788 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35802 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35803 You can change the color in
35805 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35806 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35808 \begin_inset space ~
35812 \begin_inset space ~
35817 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35823 \begin_inset Index idx
35826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35827 Color ! Change tracking
35832 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35833 's status bar when the
35834 cursor is in changed text.
35835 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35838 arg "changes-merge"
35844 \begin_layout Standard
35845 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35847 \begin_inset Index idx
35850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35859 \begin_layout Standard
35860 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35866 \begin_layout Standard
35867 \begin_inset Graphics
35868 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35876 \begin_layout Standard
35877 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35883 \begin_layout Standard
35884 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35887 \begin_layout Standard
35888 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35894 \begin_layout Standard
35895 \begin_inset Tabular
35896 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35897 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35898 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35899 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35909 arg "changes-track"
35917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35928 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35930 \begin_inset space ~
35939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35948 arg "changes-output"
35956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35964 \begin_inset space ~
35967 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35969 \begin_inset space ~
35973 \begin_inset space ~
35977 \begin_inset space ~
35986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36007 Jumps to the next change
36013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36022 arg "change-accept"
36030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36036 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36038 \begin_inset space ~
36041 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36061 arg "change-reject"
36069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36075 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36077 \begin_inset space ~
36080 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36082 \begin_inset space ~
36091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36100 arg "changes-merge"
36108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36116 \begin_inset space ~
36119 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36121 \begin_inset space ~
36130 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36139 arg "all-changes-accept"
36147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36153 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36155 \begin_inset space ~
36158 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36160 \begin_inset space ~
36164 \begin_inset space ~
36173 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36182 arg "all-changes-reject"
36190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36196 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36198 \begin_inset space ~
36201 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36216 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36240 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36242 \begin_inset space ~
36251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36274 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36276 \begin_inset space ~
36292 \begin_layout Standard
36293 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36299 \begin_layout Standard
36300 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36320 \begin_layout Standard
36321 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36322 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36323 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36324 the next change after the current cursor position.
36325 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36326 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36327 step to the next change.
36328 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36331 \begin_layout Standard
36332 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36333 to describe a change.
36336 \begin_layout Standard
36337 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36343 \begin_inset Index idx
36346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36348 -packages ! dvipost
36354 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36356 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36363 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36367 \begin_layout Section
36368 Comparison of Documents
36369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36371 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36376 \begin_inset Index idx
36379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36380 Comparison of documents
36388 \begin_layout Standard
36389 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36396 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36397 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36399 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36401 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36405 \begin_inset space ~
36409 \begin_inset space ~
36413 \begin_inset space ~
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36442 \begin_inset space ~
36447 enables the change tracking option
36450 \begin_inset space ~
36454 \begin_inset space ~
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36463 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36466 \begin_layout Section
36467 International Support
36468 \begin_inset Index idx
36471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36472 International support
36480 \begin_layout Standard
36481 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36482 with any language you want.
36483 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36484 up \SpecialChar LyX
36486 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36488 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36496 \begin_layout Standard
36497 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36498 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36505 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36512 \begin_layout Subsection
36514 \begin_inset Index idx
36517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36524 \begin_inset Index idx
36527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36528 Document ! Settings
36534 \begin_inset Index idx
36537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36538 Document ! Language
36546 \begin_layout Standard
36549 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36550 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36553 dialog lets you set
36555 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36560 \begin_layout Standard
36565 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36575 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36576 For details about the different encoding options see section
36577 \begin_inset space ~
36581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36583 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36590 \begin_layout Subsection
36591 Keyboard mapping configuration
36592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36594 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36601 \begin_layout Standard
36602 If you have for example a U.
36603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36606 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36607 can use an alternate keymap.
36608 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36613 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36614 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36615 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36618 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36625 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36630 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36631 which one you want to use.
36634 \begin_layout Standard
36635 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36636 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36637 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36641 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36642 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36643 one to support the characters you want.
36644 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36651 \begin_layout Chapter
36654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36656 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36665 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36666 topic inside the user's guide.
36669 \begin_layout Section
36671 \begin_inset Index idx
36674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36683 \begin_layout Standard
36688 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36691 \begin_layout Subsection
36695 \begin_layout Standard
36696 Creates a new document.
36699 \begin_layout Subsection
36703 \begin_layout Standard
36704 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36705 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36706 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36709 \begin_layout Subsection
36713 \begin_layout Standard
36717 \begin_layout Subsection
36721 \begin_layout Standard
36722 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36723 Click there on a file to open it.
36726 \begin_layout Subsection
36730 \begin_layout Standard
36731 Closes the current document.
36734 \begin_layout Subsection
36738 \begin_layout Standard
36739 Closes all opened documents.
36742 \begin_layout Subsection
36746 \begin_layout Standard
36747 Saves the actual document.
36750 \begin_layout Subsection
36754 \begin_layout Standard
36755 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36758 \begin_layout Subsection
36762 \begin_layout Standard
36763 Saves all opened documents.
36766 \begin_layout Subsection
36770 \begin_layout Standard
36771 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36774 \begin_layout Subsection
36778 \begin_layout Standard
36779 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36780 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36781 It is described in the section
36783 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36788 Additional Features
36793 \begin_layout Subsection
36797 \begin_layout Standard
36798 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36799 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36801 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36802 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36806 \begin_layout Standard
36807 When using the menu entry
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36815 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36819 \begin_inset space ~
36823 \begin_inset space ~
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36832 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36833 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36836 \begin_layout Subsection
36838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36840 name "subsec:Export"
36847 \begin_layout Standard
36848 You can export your document to various file formats.
36849 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36851 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36852 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36853 during its configuration.
36856 \begin_layout Standard
36857 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36865 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36872 \begin_layout Description
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36881 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36883 \begin_inset space ~
36886 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36887 \begin_inset Newline newline
36890 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36891 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36895 \begin_layout Description
36896 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36902 \begin_layout Description
36904 \begin_inset space ~
36907 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36913 \begin_layout Description
36914 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36915 's native DVI-format.
36916 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36917 files paths or file names in your document.
36919 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36926 \begin_layout Description
36927 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36928 in files paths or file names
36931 \begin_layout Description
36933 \begin_inset space ~
36940 ) DVI-format using the program
36942 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36945 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36949 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36957 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36965 \begin_layout Description
36967 \begin_inset space ~
36970 (cropped) the same as
36974 but with cropped page margins.
36977 \begin_layout Description
36979 \begin_inset space ~
36982 Dot text file with code in the programming language
36986 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
36991 \begin_layout Description
36995 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37003 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37011 \begin_layout Description
37013 \begin_inset space ~
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37020 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37024 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37032 \begin_layout Description
37036 \begin_inset space ~
37045 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37046 source that is compilable with the program
37048 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37052 \begin_layout Description
37056 \begin_inset space ~
37061 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37062 source, additionally all images used in the document
37063 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37067 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37070 \begin_layout Description
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37079 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37080 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37081 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37089 \begin_layout Description
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37102 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37103 source that is compilable with the program
37109 \begin_layout Description
37111 \begin_inset space ~
37115 \begin_inset space ~
37122 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37123 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37129 \begin_layout Description
37131 \begin_inset space ~
37134 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37135 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37141 \begin_inset space \space{}
37146 \begin_inset space ~
37150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37165 represent the version number)
37168 \begin_layout Description
37170 \begin_inset space ~
37174 \begin_inset space ~
37177 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37178 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37179 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37183 \begin_layout Description
37184 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37185 's internal XHTML engine
37188 \begin_layout Description
37190 \begin_inset space ~
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37202 \begin_inset space ~
37205 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37210 For the conversion the program
37219 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37222 \begin_layout Description
37223 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37228 \begin_layout Description
37230 \begin_inset space ~
37233 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37235 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37238 For the conversion the program
37247 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37250 \begin_layout Description
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37255 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37256 For the conversion the program
37265 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37268 \begin_layout Description
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37273 (cropped) the same as
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37281 but with cropped page margins
37284 \begin_layout Description
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37293 PDF-format using the program
37297 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37300 \begin_layout Description
37304 \begin_inset space ~
37308 \begin_inset space ~
37316 \begin_inset space ~
37321 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37326 \begin_inset space \space{}
37329 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37333 \begin_layout Description
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37342 PDF-format using the program
37344 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37347 , produces PDF-files directly
37350 \begin_layout Description
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37359 PDF-format using the program
37363 , produces PDF-files directly
37366 \begin_layout Description
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37375 PDF-format using the program
37379 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37382 \begin_layout Description
37386 \begin_inset space ~
37391 PDF-format using the program
37396 , produces PDF-files directly
37399 \begin_layout Description
37403 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_layout Description
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37419 \begin_inset space ~
37424 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37425 and then exported as text using the program
37430 \begin_layout Description
37435 PostScript format using the program
37443 options see section
37444 \begin_inset space ~
37448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37450 reference "subsec:General-output"
37457 \begin_layout Description
37458 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37459 source and also code in the statistical programming
37473 it is possible to use
37477 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37481 \begin_layout Standard
37482 If one of the menu entries
37489 \begin_inset space ~
37498 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37500 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37508 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37513 \begin_inset Index idx
37516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37517 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37526 \begin_layout Subsection
37530 \begin_layout Standard
37531 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37532 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37535 \begin_inset space ~
37539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37541 reference "sec:Paths"
37546 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37555 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37556 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37557 's preferences as described in section
37558 \begin_inset space ~
37562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37564 reference "subsec:Converters"
37571 \begin_layout Subsection
37572 New and Close Window
37575 \begin_layout Standard
37576 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37580 \begin_layout Subsection
37584 \begin_layout Standard
37585 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37588 \begin_layout Section
37590 \begin_inset Index idx
37593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37602 \begin_layout Subsection
37606 \begin_layout Standard
37607 Described in section
37608 \begin_inset space ~
37612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37614 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37621 \begin_layout Subsection
37622 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37625 \begin_layout Standard
37626 Described in section
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37633 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37640 \begin_layout Subsection
37644 \begin_layout Standard
37645 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37646 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37649 \begin_layout Subsection
37653 \begin_layout Standard
37654 Selects the whole document.
37657 \begin_layout Subsection
37658 Find & Replace (Quick)
37661 \begin_layout Standard
37662 Described in section
37663 \begin_inset space ~
37667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37669 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37676 \begin_layout Subsection
37677 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37680 \begin_layout Standard
37681 Described in section
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37688 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37695 \begin_layout Subsection
37696 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37699 \begin_layout Standard
37700 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37704 \begin_layout Subsection
37708 \begin_layout Standard
37709 Described in section
37710 \begin_inset space ~
37714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37716 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37723 \begin_layout Subsection
37725 \begin_inset Index idx
37728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37729 Paragraph ! Settings
37737 \begin_layout Standard
37738 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37739 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37743 \begin_layout Standard
37744 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37745 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37751 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37752 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37754 \begin_inset space ~
37762 \begin_layout Subsection
37763 Table and Rows & Columns
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37768 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37769 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37772 \begin_layout Subsection
37776 \begin_layout Standard
37777 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37778 It will dissolve this inset.
37779 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37783 \begin_layout Subsection
37787 \begin_layout Standard
37788 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37789 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37792 \begin_layout Subsection
37793 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37796 \begin_layout Standard
37797 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37799 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37800 \begin_inset space ~
37804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37806 reference "sec:Nesting"
37811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37813 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37820 \begin_layout Subsection
37823 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37826 \begin_layout Standard
37827 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37828 nts of the same type.
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37836 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37840 for an explanation.
37843 \begin_layout Section
37845 \begin_inset Index idx
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37857 \begin_layout Standard
37858 At the bottom of the
37862 menu the opened documents are listed.
37865 \begin_layout Subsection
37866 Open/Close all Insets
37869 \begin_layout Standard
37870 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37873 \begin_layout Subsection
37874 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37877 \begin_layout Standard
37878 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37881 \begin_layout Standard
37882 Math macros are described in the
37889 \begin_layout Subsection
37893 \begin_layout Standard
37894 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37901 reference "sec:Navigating"
37906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37908 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37915 \begin_layout Subsection
37919 \begin_layout Standard
37920 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37928 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37935 \begin_layout Subsection
37939 \begin_layout Standard
37940 Opens a window showing console messages.
37941 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37946 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37947 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37948 is processing the document.
37951 \begin_layout Subsection
37953 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37955 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37960 \begin_inset Index idx
37963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37972 \begin_layout Standard
37973 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
37974 All toolbars and the
37977 \begin_inset space ~
37982 can be turned on and off.
37987 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
37999 \begin_inset space ~
38011 \begin_inset space ~
38016 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38020 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38027 \begin_layout Standard
38032 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38036 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38037 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38038 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38039 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38040 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38043 \begin_layout Standard
38045 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38046 \begin_inset space ~
38050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38052 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38059 \begin_layout Subsection
38063 \begin_layout Standard
38067 \begin_inset space ~
38071 \begin_inset space ~
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset space ~
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38092 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38093 's main window vertically while
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \begin_inset space ~
38121 will split it horizontally.
38122 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38123 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38124 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38125 three or more documents at the same time.
38126 To close a split view, use the menu
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38133 \begin_inset space ~
38141 \begin_layout Subsection
38145 \begin_layout Standard
38146 Closes a split view.
38149 \begin_layout Subsection
38153 \begin_layout Standard
38154 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38155 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38156 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38157 's main window fullscreen.
38158 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38159 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38162 \begin_layout Section
38164 \begin_inset Index idx
38167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38176 \begin_layout Subsection
38180 \begin_layout Standard
38181 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38182 \begin_inset space ~
38186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38188 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38199 \begin_layout Subsection
38201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38203 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38211 Here you can insert the following characters:
38214 \begin_layout Description
38219 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38222 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38223 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38224 -packages you have installed.
38225 You can get a complete display by checking
38228 \begin_inset space ~
38234 \begin_inset Newline newline
38238 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38246 Not all characters will be visible in the
38250 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38251 dialog (see section
38252 \begin_inset space ~
38256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38258 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38262 ) can display every character.
38270 \begin_layout Description
38271 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38275 \begin_layout Description
38277 \begin_inset space ~
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38284 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38291 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38298 \begin_layout Description
38300 \begin_inset space ~
38303 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38306 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38307 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38313 \begin_layout Description
38315 \begin_inset space ~
38318 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38321 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38322 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38328 \begin_layout Description
38330 \begin_inset space ~
38333 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38337 \begin_layout Description
38339 \begin_inset space ~
38342 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38346 \begin_layout Description
38348 \begin_inset space ~
38351 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38357 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38363 \begin_layout Description
38365 \begin_inset space ~
38368 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38372 \begin_layout Description
38374 \begin_inset space ~
38378 \begin_inset Index idx
38381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 \begin_inset Index idx
38391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38392 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38397 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38398 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38400 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38406 \begin_inset Index idx
38409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 \begin_inset Newline newline
38420 More information about this feature can be found in the
38426 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38432 \begin_layout Description
38433 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38435 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38436 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38440 \begin_layout Subsection
38444 \begin_layout Standard
38445 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38448 \begin_layout Description
38449 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38450 \begin_inset script superscript
38452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38461 \begin_layout Description
38462 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38463 \begin_inset script subscript
38465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38474 \begin_layout Description
38476 \begin_inset space ~
38479 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38480 \begin_inset space ~
38484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38486 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38493 \begin_layout Description
38495 \begin_inset space ~
38498 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38499 \begin_inset space ~
38503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38505 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38512 \begin_layout Description
38514 \begin_inset space ~
38517 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38518 \begin_inset space ~
38522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38524 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38531 \begin_layout Description
38533 \begin_inset space ~
38536 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38542 \begin_inset space \space{}
38545 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38546 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38555 To insert a fraction use the command
38560 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38564 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38573 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38580 \begin_layout Description
38582 \begin_inset space ~
38585 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38586 \begin_inset space ~
38590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38592 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38599 \begin_layout Description
38601 \begin_inset space ~
38604 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38605 \begin_inset space ~
38609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38611 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38618 \begin_layout Description
38620 \begin_inset space ~
38623 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38624 \begin_inset space ~
38628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38630 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38637 \begin_layout Description
38638 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38639 \begin_inset space ~
38643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38645 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38652 \begin_layout Description
38654 \begin_inset space ~
38657 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38664 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38671 \begin_layout Description
38673 \begin_inset space ~
38676 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38683 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38690 \begin_layout Description
38692 \begin_inset space ~
38696 \begin_inset space ~
38699 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38700 \begin_inset space ~
38704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38706 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38713 \begin_layout Description
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38718 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38719 as described in section
38720 \begin_inset space ~
38724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38726 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38733 \begin_layout Description
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38738 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38745 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38752 \begin_layout Description
38754 \begin_inset space ~
38757 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38758 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38760 \begin_inset space ~
38764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38766 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38773 \begin_layout Description
38775 \begin_inset space ~
38778 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38779 \begin_inset space ~
38783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38785 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38792 \begin_layout Description
38794 \begin_inset space ~
38798 \begin_inset space ~
38801 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38808 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38815 \begin_layout Subsection
38819 \begin_layout Standard
38820 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38824 \begin_inset space ~
38845 are described in section
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38852 reference "sec:toc"
38861 is described in section
38862 \begin_inset space ~
38866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38868 reference "sec:Index"
38876 is described in section
38877 \begin_inset space ~
38881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38883 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38889 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38892 is described in section
38893 \begin_inset space ~
38897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38899 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38906 \begin_layout Subsection
38910 \begin_layout Standard
38911 To insert floats, as described in section
38912 \begin_inset space ~
38916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38918 reference "sec:Floats"
38922 and in detail the chapter
38929 \begin_inset space ~
38937 \begin_layout Subsection
38941 \begin_layout Standard
38942 To insert notes, described in section
38943 \begin_inset space ~
38947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38949 reference "sec:Notes"
38956 \begin_layout Subsection
38960 \begin_layout Standard
38961 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
38963 Branches are described in section
38964 \begin_inset space ~
38968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38970 reference "sec:Branches"
38977 \begin_layout Subsection
38981 \begin_layout Standard
38982 Inserts document class-specific insets.
38983 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
38985 An example is the document class
38986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38993 with three custom insets.
38996 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39000 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39006 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39009 \begin_layout Subsection
39011 \begin_inset Index idx
39014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39023 \begin_layout Standard
39024 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39026 For more information see chapter
39028 External Document Parts
39031 \begin_inset space ~
39037 \begin_layout Subsection
39039 \begin_inset Index idx
39042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39051 \begin_layout Standard
39052 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39053 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39060 \begin_inset space ~
39068 \begin_layout Subsection
39072 \begin_layout Standard
39077 dialog as described in section
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39084 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39091 \begin_layout Subsection
39095 \begin_layout Standard
39100 as described in section
39101 \begin_inset space ~
39105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39107 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39114 \begin_layout Subsection
39118 \begin_layout Standard
39123 as described in section
39124 \begin_inset space ~
39128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39130 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39137 \begin_layout Subsection
39139 \begin_inset Index idx
39142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 \begin_inset Index idx
39152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39153 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39161 \begin_layout Standard
39162 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39163 Floats are described in section
39164 \begin_inset space ~
39168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39170 reference "sec:Floats"
39174 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39176 Multi-page Captions
39181 \begin_inset space ~
39189 \begin_layout Subsection
39193 \begin_layout Standard
39194 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39195 \begin_inset space ~
39199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39201 reference "sec:Index"
39208 \begin_layout Subsection
39212 \begin_layout Standard
39213 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39214 \begin_inset space ~
39218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39220 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39227 \begin_layout Subsection
39231 \begin_layout Standard
39232 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39233 Tables are described in section
39234 \begin_inset space ~
39238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39240 reference "sec:Tables"
39244 and in detail in the chapter
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39259 \begin_layout Subsection
39263 \begin_layout Standard
39269 Graphics are described in section
39270 \begin_inset space ~
39274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39276 reference "sec:Graphics"
39283 \begin_layout Subsection
39287 \begin_layout Standard
39288 Inserts a URL as described in section
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39295 reference "subsec:URLs"
39302 \begin_layout Subsection
39306 \begin_layout Standard
39307 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39308 \begin_inset space ~
39312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39314 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39321 \begin_layout Subsection
39325 \begin_layout Standard
39326 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39327 \begin_inset space ~
39331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39333 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39340 \begin_layout Subsection
39344 \begin_layout Standard
39345 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39346 \begin_inset space ~
39350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39352 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39359 \begin_layout Subsection
39363 \begin_layout Standard
39364 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39365 title or caption of a float.
39366 Inserts a short title as described in section
39367 \begin_inset space ~
39371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39373 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39380 \begin_layout Subsection
39385 \begin_layout Standard
39386 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39387 Code box as described in section
39388 \begin_inset space ~
39392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39394 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39401 \begin_layout Subsection
39403 \begin_inset Index idx
39406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39415 \begin_layout Standard
39416 Inserts a program listings box.
39417 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39419 Program Code Listings
39424 \begin_inset space ~
39432 \begin_layout Subsection
39436 \begin_layout Standard
39437 Inserts the actual date.
39438 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39442 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39450 \begin_inset space ~
39458 \begin_layout Subsection
39462 \begin_layout Standard
39463 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39464 \begin_inset space ~
39468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39470 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39477 \begin_layout Section
39479 \begin_inset Index idx
39482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39491 \begin_layout Standard
39492 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39493 \begin_inset space ~
39496 of the current document.
39497 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39500 \begin_layout Subsection
39504 \begin_layout Standard
39505 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39506 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39507 to jump, for example, between section
39508 \begin_inset space ~
39512 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39513 \begin_inset space ~
39516 2.5 and use the submenu
39519 \begin_inset space ~
39523 \begin_inset space ~
39530 \begin_inset space ~
39536 \begin_inset space ~
39540 \begin_inset space ~
39546 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39550 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39556 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39559 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39562 \begin_layout Standard
39563 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39567 \begin_inset space ~
39572 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39575 \begin_inset space ~
39580 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39583 \begin_layout Subsection
39584 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39587 \begin_layout Standard
39588 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39592 \begin_layout Subsection
39596 \begin_layout Standard
39597 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39598 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39599 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39603 \begin_inset space ~
39607 \begin_inset space ~
39615 \begin_layout Subsection
39619 \begin_layout Standard
39620 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39623 The \SpecialChar LyX
39624 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39626 \begin_inset space ~
39634 \begin_inset space ~
39639 manual for a detailed description.
39642 \begin_layout Section
39644 \begin_inset Index idx
39647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39656 \begin_layout Subsection
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39661 Change Tracking is described in section
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39668 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39675 \begin_layout Subsection
39683 \begin_layout Standard
39684 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39685 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39686 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39688 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39689 to the clipboard or update the view.
39690 \begin_inset Newline newline
39693 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39697 \begin_layout Standard
39700 Open Containing Directory
39702 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39703 's temporary folder for the document.
39704 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39705 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39706 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39707 For example some journals require to send the
39711 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39715 \begin_layout Subsection
39716 Start Appendix Here
39719 \begin_layout Standard
39720 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39721 as described in section
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39728 reference "sec:Appendices"
39735 \begin_layout Subsection
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39743 \begin_layout Standard
39744 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39745 default output format for the document (menu
39747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39748 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39749 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39751 \begin_inset space ~
39755 \begin_inset space ~
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39767 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39771 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39774 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39775 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39777 \begin_inset space ~
39780 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39782 \begin_inset space ~
39785 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39787 \begin_inset space ~
39791 \begin_inset space ~
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39803 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39807 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39808 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39810 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39811 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39813 \begin_inset space ~
39816 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39818 \begin_inset space ~
39821 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39829 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39831 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39836 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39837 when it is first configured.
39838 The default output format is
39841 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_layout Subsection
39850 View (Other Formats)
39853 \begin_layout Standard
39854 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39855 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39856 actual document with an external program.
39857 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39858 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39859 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39861 All possible formats are listed in section
39862 \begin_inset space ~
39866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39868 reference "subsec:Export"
39873 You should at least see the menu entry
39878 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39880 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39888 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39893 \begin_inset Index idx
39896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39897 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39907 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39908 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39910 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39911 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39913 \begin_inset space ~
39916 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39918 \begin_inset space ~
39921 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39931 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39936 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39937 when it is first configured.
39940 \begin_layout Subsection
39942 \begin_inset space ~
39948 \begin_layout Standard
39949 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39950 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39953 \begin_layout Subsection
39954 Update (Other Formats)
39957 \begin_layout Standard
39958 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
39959 your document without opening a new viewer window.
39962 \begin_layout Subsection
39963 View Master Document
39966 \begin_layout Standard
39967 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
39969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39983 \begin_inset space ~
39988 manual for more information on this topic).
39989 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
39990 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
39994 \begin_inset space ~
39998 \begin_inset space ~
40003 generates the output of the whole book, while
40007 will just output the chapter alone.
40010 \begin_layout Standard
40011 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40012 in the document settings (menu
40014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40016 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40018 \begin_inset space ~
40022 \begin_inset space ~
40028 \begin_inset space ~
40032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40034 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40038 ) or in the preferences (menu
40040 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40041 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40046 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40048 \begin_inset space ~
40051 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40053 \begin_inset space ~
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40063 \begin_inset space ~
40067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40069 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40076 \begin_layout Subsection
40077 Update Master Document
40080 \begin_layout Standard
40081 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40097 \begin_inset space ~
40102 manual for more information on this topic).
40103 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40104 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40107 \begin_layout Standard
40108 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40109 in the document settings (menu
40111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40113 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40125 \begin_inset space ~
40129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40131 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40135 ) or in the preferences (menu
40137 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40138 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40140 \begin_inset space ~
40143 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40148 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40150 \begin_inset space ~
40154 \begin_inset space ~
40160 \begin_inset space ~
40164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40166 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40173 \begin_layout Subsection
40175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40177 name "subsec:Compressed"
40184 \begin_layout Standard
40185 Un/compresses the current document.
40186 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40187 compression (see the
40189 Additional Features
40191 manual for details).
40194 \begin_layout Subsection
40198 \begin_layout Standard
40199 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40202 \begin_layout Subsection
40206 \begin_layout Standard
40207 The document settings are described in appendix
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40214 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40221 \begin_layout Section
40223 \begin_inset Index idx
40226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40235 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 \begin_layout Standard
40240 Spell checking is explained in section
40241 \begin_inset space ~
40245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40247 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40254 \begin_layout Subsection
40258 \begin_layout Standard
40259 The thesaurus is described in section
40260 \begin_inset space ~
40264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40266 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40273 \begin_layout Subsection
40275 \begin_inset Index idx
40278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40285 \begin_inset Index idx
40288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40297 \begin_layout Standard
40298 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40299 the highlighted document part.
40302 \begin_layout Subsection
40308 \begin_inset Index idx
40311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40312 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40321 \begin_layout Standard
40322 Generates with the help of the program
40324 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40327 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40328 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40329 This feature is not available on Windows.
40332 \begin_layout Subsection
40338 \begin_inset Index idx
40341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40351 \begin_layout Standard
40352 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40362 to see the full filename paths.
40365 \begin_layout Subsection
40367 \begin_inset Index idx
40370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40379 \begin_layout Standard
40380 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40381 files as described in section
40382 \begin_inset space ~
40386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40388 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40395 \begin_layout Subsection
40397 \begin_inset Index idx
40400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40413 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40431 \begin_inset Index idx
40434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40435 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40444 \begin_layout Standard
40445 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40446 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40447 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40448 -packages and programs it needs; see
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40456 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40463 \begin_layout Subsection
40467 \begin_layout Standard
40472 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40473 \begin_inset space ~
40477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40479 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40486 \begin_layout Section
40488 \begin_inset Index idx
40491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40500 \begin_layout Standard
40501 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40502 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40504 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40508 \begin_layout Standard
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40517 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40518 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40519 packages and classes found
40520 by \SpecialChar LyX
40522 \begin_inset space ~
40526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40528 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40535 \begin_layout Standard
40539 \begin_inset space ~
40544 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40549 \begin_layout Section
40551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40553 name "sec:Toolbars"
40560 \begin_layout Standard
40561 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40562 \begin_inset space ~
40566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40568 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40575 \begin_layout Standard
40576 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40577 This is described in the
40579 Additional Features
40584 \begin_layout Subsection
40586 \begin_inset Index idx
40589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40598 \begin_layout Standard
40599 \begin_inset Graphics
40600 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40608 \begin_layout Standard
40609 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40615 \begin_layout Standard
40616 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40633 \begin_inset Note Note
40636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40637 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40642 manual for more information.
40650 \begin_layout Standard
40651 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40657 \begin_layout Standard
40658 \begin_inset Tabular
40659 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40660 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40662 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40668 \begin_inset Graphics
40669 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40683 pull-down box for the environments
40696 \begin_layout Standard
40697 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40703 \begin_layout Standard
40705 \begin_inset Tabular
40706 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40707 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40708 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40709 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40733 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40763 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40793 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40809 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40823 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40839 arg "spelling-continuously"
40847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40851 Spellcheck continuously
40857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40880 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40910 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40940 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40970 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41000 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41007 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41016 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41030 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41056 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41070 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41098 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41112 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41113 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41141 Emphasize text, function of the
41143 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41145 \begin_inset space ~
41148 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41178 Set text to noun style, function of the
41180 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41185 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41203 arg "textstyle-apply"
41211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41215 Format text using the current settings in the
41217 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41222 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41231 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41255 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41275 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41303 arg "tabular-insert"
41311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41317 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41333 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 Toggle outline window on/off,
41347 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41363 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41375 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41390 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41402 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41415 \begin_layout Subsection
41417 \begin_inset Index idx
41420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 \begin_inset Graphics
41431 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41439 \begin_layout Standard
41440 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41446 \begin_layout Standard
41447 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41451 \begin_layout Standard
41452 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41458 \begin_layout Standard
41459 \begin_inset Tabular
41460 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41461 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41462 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41463 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41500 arg "layout Enumerate"
41508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41518 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41527 arg "layout Itemize"
41535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41545 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41572 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41581 arg "layout Description"
41589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41608 arg "depth-increment"
41616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41622 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41624 \begin_inset space ~
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41646 arg "depth-decrement"
41654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41662 \begin_inset space ~
41666 \begin_inset space ~
41675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41684 arg "float-insert figure"
41692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41699 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41706 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41715 arg "float-insert table"
41723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41730 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41737 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41760 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41776 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41806 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41827 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41852 \begin_inset space ~
41861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41870 arg "nomencl-insert"
41878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41884 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41904 arg "footnote-insert"
41912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41925 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41934 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41950 \begin_inset space ~
41959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41982 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41983 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42003 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42017 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42024 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42054 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42079 \begin_inset space ~
42088 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42097 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42112 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42128 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42143 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42145 \begin_inset space ~
42154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42163 arg "dialog-show character"
42171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42177 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42182 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42198 arg "layout-paragraph"
42206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42212 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42214 \begin_inset space ~
42223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42232 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42246 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42260 \begin_layout Subsection
42261 View/Update Toolbar
42262 \begin_inset Index idx
42265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42266 Toolbar ! View / Update
42274 \begin_layout Standard
42275 \begin_inset Graphics
42276 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42283 \begin_layout Standard
42284 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42290 \begin_layout Standard
42291 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42295 \begin_layout Standard
42296 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42302 \begin_layout Standard
42303 \begin_inset Tabular
42304 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42305 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42306 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42307 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42347 arg "buffer-update"
42355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42377 arg "master-buffer-view"
42385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42393 \begin_inset space ~
42402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42411 arg "master-buffer-update"
42419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42425 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42427 \begin_inset space ~
42431 \begin_inset space ~
42440 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42449 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42463 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42464 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42465 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42466 Synchronize with Output
42472 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42496 View (Other Formats)
42502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42509 arg "update-others"
42517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42524 Update (Other Formats)
42537 \begin_layout Standard
42538 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42542 \begin_layout Subsection
42546 \begin_layout Standard
42547 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42548 \begin_inset space ~
42552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42554 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42558 , the table toolbar
42559 \begin_inset Index idx
42562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 \begin_inset space ~
42576 manual and the math macro toolbar
42577 \begin_inset Index idx
42580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42593 \begin_layout Chapter
42594 The Document Settings
42595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42597 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42602 \begin_inset Index idx
42605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42606 Document ! Settings
42614 \begin_layout Standard
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42623 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42624 is called with the menu
42626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42630 You can save your document settings as default with the
42632 Save as Document Defaults
42634 button in any dialog.
42635 This will create a template named
42639 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42640 when you create a new document without
42644 \begin_layout Standard
42649 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42650 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42653 \begin_layout Standard
42654 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42655 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42656 to find the one you are looking for.
42657 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42658 the submenus of the dialog.
42660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42664 \begin_inset space \space{}
42668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42675 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42676 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42677 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42680 \begin_layout Section
42684 \begin_layout Standard
42685 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42687 Document classes are described in section
42688 \begin_inset space ~
42692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42694 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42702 \begin_layout Standard
42706 \begin_inset space ~
42711 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42716 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42717 as a layout for a document class.
42718 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42720 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42729 \begin_layout Standard
42730 Some classes use special class options by default.
42731 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42735 and you can decide to use them or not.
42736 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42737 recommended you leave them untouched.
42742 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42743 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42748 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42750 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42756 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42757 \begin_inset Newline newline
42762 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42765 \begin_inset Newline newline
42768 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42769 distribution, see section
42774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42776 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42789 \begin_layout Standard
42794 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42795 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42796 in the background if the child document
42797 is opened without its master.
42798 This way child documents are always compilable.
42799 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42806 \begin_inset space ~
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42815 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42826 \begin_inset Index idx
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42831 -packages ! prettyref
42837 \begin_inset Index idx
42840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42842 -packages ! refstyle
42847 for cross-references, see section
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42854 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42861 \begin_layout Section
42865 \begin_layout Standard
42866 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42867 Please refer to the section
42870 \begin_inset space ~
42878 \begin_inset space ~
42883 manual for details.
42886 \begin_layout Section
42890 \begin_layout Standard
42891 Modules are explained in section
42892 \begin_inset space ~
42896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42898 reference "subsec:Modules"
42905 \begin_layout Section
42909 \begin_layout Standard
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42917 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42924 \begin_layout Section
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42929 The document font settings are described in section
42930 \begin_inset space ~
42934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42936 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42943 \begin_layout Section
42947 \begin_layout Standard
42948 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
42960 \begin_inset space ~
42965 and whether it should be a
42968 \begin_inset space ~
42973 can also be specified here.
42976 \begin_layout Standard
42977 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
42978 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
42979 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
42981 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
42984 \begin_layout Standard
42987 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
42990 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
42991 justifies the text on screen.
42992 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
42996 \begin_layout Section
43000 \begin_layout Standard
43001 This dialog is described in sections
43002 \begin_inset space ~
43006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43008 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43015 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43022 \begin_layout Section
43026 \begin_layout Standard
43027 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43028 \begin_inset space ~
43032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43034 reference "subsec:Margins"
43041 \begin_layout Section
43043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43045 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43050 \begin_inset Index idx
43053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43054 Language ! Encoding
43062 \begin_layout Standard
43063 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43064 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43065 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43067 is always encoded in utf8).
43068 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43069 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43070 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43071 -command is not known for
43072 a particular character).
43075 \begin_layout Standard
43076 If you use the option
43081 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43082 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43083 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43085 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43086 exactly one encoding.
43087 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43090 \begin_layout Standard
43092 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43093 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43094 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43095 installation supports Unicode), choose
43096 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43097 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43098 is quite incomplete, so
43099 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43104 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43105 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43106 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43107 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43108 -commands is not used, because all
43109 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43110 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43111 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43112 , two new alternative engines
43113 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43115 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43117 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43120 \begin_inset space ~
43128 \begin_inset space ~
43136 \begin_inset space ~
43142 \begin_inset space ~
43146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43148 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43153 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43157 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43160 \begin_layout Standard
43164 \begin_inset space ~
43169 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43170 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43180 The possible settings are:
43183 \begin_layout Description
43184 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43187 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43191 \begin_inset space ~
43195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43197 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43204 \begin_layout Description
43205 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43206 format you will use.
43207 In many cases this will be
43212 \begin_inset Index idx
43215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43223 If the newer package
43228 \begin_inset Index idx
43231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43233 -packages ! polyglossia
43238 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43239 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43240 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43242 this package will be used instead of
43249 \begin_layout Description
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43262 would be more appropriate.
43265 \begin_layout Description
43266 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43267 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43271 (for German texts), type in
43274 \begin_inset Newline newline
43279 usepackage{ngerman}
43282 \begin_layout Description
43283 None will not use a language package.
43284 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43287 \begin_layout Standard
43288 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43291 \begin_layout Description
43293 \begin_inset space ~
43297 \begin_inset space ~
43301 \begin_inset space ~
43308 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43314 \begin_inset Index idx
43317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43319 -packages ! inputenc
43325 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43326 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43327 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43331 \begin_layout Description
43332 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43334 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43335 commands, which may result in a big
43336 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43337 -commands are needed.
43340 \begin_layout Description
43342 \begin_inset space ~
43346 \begin_inset space ~
43349 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43352 \begin_layout Description
43354 \begin_inset space ~
43358 \begin_inset space ~
43361 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43364 \begin_layout Description
43366 \begin_inset space ~
43369 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43372 \begin_layout Description
43374 \begin_inset space ~
43378 \begin_inset space ~
43381 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43382 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43385 \begin_layout Description
43387 \begin_inset space ~
43391 \begin_inset space ~
43394 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43398 \begin_layout Description
43400 \begin_inset space ~
43404 \begin_inset space ~
43407 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43408 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43411 \begin_layout Description
43413 \begin_inset space ~
43417 \begin_inset space ~
43421 \begin_inset space ~
43424 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43425 \begin_inset space ~
43431 \begin_layout Description
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43441 \begin_inset space ~
43444 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43445 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43448 \begin_layout Description
43450 \begin_inset space ~
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43457 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43458 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43459 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43460 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43461 \begin_inset space ~
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43471 \begin_layout Description
43473 \begin_inset space ~
43477 \begin_inset space ~
43480 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43481 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43482 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43484 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43485 \begin_inset space ~
43489 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_layout Description
43497 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43504 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43507 \begin_layout Description
43509 \begin_inset space ~
43513 \begin_inset space ~
43516 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43519 \begin_layout Description
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43525 \begin_inset space ~
43528 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43531 \begin_layout Description
43533 \begin_inset space ~
43536 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43539 \begin_layout Description
43541 \begin_inset space ~
43544 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43547 \begin_layout Description
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43556 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43559 \begin_layout Description
43561 \begin_inset space ~
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43571 \begin_layout Description
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43580 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43583 \begin_layout Description
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43589 \begin_inset space ~
43595 \begin_layout Description
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43601 \begin_inset space ~
43604 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43610 \begin_inset Index idx
43613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43620 , when using this, set the document language to
43625 \begin_layout Description
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43634 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43639 , when using this, set the document language to
43642 \begin_inset space ~
43648 \begin_layout Description
43650 \begin_inset space ~
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43657 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43663 \begin_inset Index idx
43666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43668 -packages ! japanese
43673 , when using this, set the document language to
43678 \begin_layout Description
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43687 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43692 , when using this, set the document language to
43697 \begin_layout Description
43699 \begin_inset space ~
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43706 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43711 , when using this, set the document language to
43716 \begin_layout Description
43718 \begin_inset space ~
43721 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43724 \begin_layout Description
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43730 \begin_inset space ~
43734 \begin_inset space ~
43737 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43740 \begin_layout Description
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43746 \begin_inset space ~
43750 \begin_inset space ~
43753 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43754 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43755 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43758 \begin_layout Description
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43770 \begin_layout Description
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43779 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43780 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43783 \begin_layout Description
43785 \begin_inset space ~
43789 \begin_inset space ~
43792 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43798 \begin_inset Index idx
43801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43808 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43811 \begin_layout Description
43813 \begin_inset space ~
43821 \begin_inset space ~
43824 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43831 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43834 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43841 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43842 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43844 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43847 \begin_layout Description
43849 \begin_inset space ~
43853 \begin_inset space ~
43856 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43862 \begin_inset Index idx
43865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43872 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43875 \begin_layout Description
43877 \begin_inset space ~
43880 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43886 \begin_inset Index idx
43889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43891 -packages ! inputenc
43897 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43901 \begin_layout Description
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43907 \begin_inset space ~
43911 \begin_inset space ~
43914 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43915 \begin_inset space ~
43921 \begin_layout Description
43923 \begin_inset space ~
43927 \begin_inset space ~
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43934 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43935 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43936 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43940 \begin_layout Description
43942 \begin_inset space ~
43946 \begin_inset space ~
43950 \begin_inset space ~
43953 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43954 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43957 \begin_layout Section
43959 \begin_inset Index idx
43962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43969 \begin_inset Index idx
43972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43979 \begin_inset Index idx
43982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43983 Color ! Shaded boxes
43989 \begin_inset Index idx
43992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43993 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44001 \begin_layout Standard
44002 Here you can alter the font color for the
44006 (default: black), for
44009 \begin_inset space ~
44014 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44018 (default: white) and for
44021 \begin_inset space ~
44031 sets the color back to the default.
44034 \begin_layout Standard
44035 Clicking any button showing
44043 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44044 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44045 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44046 later more quickly.
44049 \begin_layout Standard
44050 Note, if you change the
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44058 font color and use the option
44061 \begin_inset space ~
44066 in the document settings under
44069 \begin_inset space ~
44074 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44075 \begin_inset space ~
44079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44081 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44088 \begin_layout Standard
44089 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44095 \begin_layout Standard
44099 \begin_inset space ~
44108 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44111 \begin_inset space ~
44114 Code after a forced page break:
44117 \begin_layout Itemize
44118 For the page color:
44119 \begin_inset Newline newline
44126 pagecolor{color name}
44129 \begin_layout Itemize
44130 For the text color:
44131 \begin_inset Newline newline
44141 \begin_layout Standard
44142 You are restricted to one of
44178 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44185 \begin_inset space ~
44191 \begin_inset Newline newline
44194 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44195 names to refer to them:
44198 \begin_layout Itemize
44204 \begin_inset Newline newline
44209 page_backgroundcolor
44212 \begin_layout Itemize
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44222 \begin_inset Newline newline
44230 \begin_layout Itemize
44234 \begin_inset space ~
44240 \begin_inset Newline newline
44248 \begin_layout Itemize
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44258 \begin_inset Newline newline
44266 \begin_layout Standard
44267 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44270 \begin_inset space ~
44278 \begin_inset space ~
44286 \begin_layout Section
44290 \begin_layout Standard
44291 Here you can adjust the
44295 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44299 as described in section
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44306 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44313 \begin_layout Section
44317 \begin_layout Standard
44318 Here you can specify if a
44319 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44322 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44324 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44330 \begin_inset Index idx
44333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44335 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44337 -packages ! biblatex
44349 \begin_inset Index idx
44352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44364 \begin_inset Index idx
44367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44369 -packages ! jurabib
44376 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44377 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44379 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44384 Sectioned bibliography
44386 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44392 \begin_inset Index idx
44395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44397 -packages ! bibtopic
44403 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44405 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44410 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44412 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44416 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44423 for the generation of the bibliography.
44424 For a further description
44425 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44433 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44435 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44442 \begin_layout Section
44446 \begin_layout Standard
44447 Here you can define the
44451 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44453 \begin_inset space ~
44457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44459 reference "sec:Index"
44466 \begin_layout Section
44470 \begin_layout Standard
44471 The PDF properties are explained in section
44472 \begin_inset space ~
44476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44478 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44485 \begin_layout Section
44489 \begin_layout Standard
44490 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44491 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44497 \begin_inset Index idx
44500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44502 -packages ! amsmath
44512 \begin_inset Index idx
44515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44517 -packages ! amssymb
44527 \begin_inset Index idx
44530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44542 \begin_inset Index idx
44545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44557 \begin_inset Index idx
44560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44562 -packages ! mathdots
44572 \begin_inset Index idx
44575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44577 -packages ! mathtools
44587 \begin_inset Index idx
44590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44602 \begin_inset Index idx
44605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44607 -packages ! stackrel
44617 \begin_inset Index idx
44620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44622 -packages ! stmaryrd
44632 \begin_inset Index idx
44635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44637 -packages ! undertilde
44642 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44645 \begin_layout Description
44646 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44647 -errors in formulas,
44648 ensure that you have this enabled.
44651 \begin_layout Description
44652 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44653 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44654 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44658 \begin_layout Description
44659 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44662 \begin_inset space ~
44674 \begin_layout Description
44675 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44690 \begin_layout Description
44691 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44702 \begin_layout Description
44703 mathtools is used for the math commands
44739 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44746 \begin_layout Description
44747 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44749 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44758 \begin_layout Description
44759 stackrel is used for the math command
44776 \begin_layout Description
44777 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44780 \begin_layout Description
44781 undertilde is used for the math command
44789 Accents for one Character
44798 \begin_layout Section
44802 \begin_layout Standard
44803 The float placement options are described in the section
44806 \begin_inset space ~
44814 \begin_inset space ~
44822 \begin_layout Section
44826 \begin_layout Standard
44827 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44829 Program Code Listings
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44842 \begin_layout Section
44846 \begin_layout Standard
44847 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44855 set to be used and set the
44860 The itemize environment is described in section
44861 \begin_inset space ~
44865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44867 reference "sec:Itemize"
44874 \begin_layout Standard
44875 You can furthermore specify a
44878 \begin_inset space ~
44883 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44884 command of the desired character.
44885 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44892 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44898 \begin_inset space \space{}
44902 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44912 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44913 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44916 \begin_layout Standard
44917 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44925 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44926 -packages in the preamble (menu
44929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44930 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44933 \begin_inset space ~
44939 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44943 usepackage{textcomp}
44946 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44950 usepackage{amssymb}
44960 \begin_layout Section
44964 \begin_layout Standard
44965 Branches are described in section
44966 \begin_inset space ~
44970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44972 reference "sec:Branches"
44979 \begin_layout Section
44981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44983 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
44990 \begin_layout Standard
44991 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
44994 \begin_layout Description
44996 \begin_inset space ~
45000 \begin_inset space ~
45003 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45023 View Master Document
45024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45031 Update Master Document
45032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45039 menu or the toolbar.
45040 The default is set in
45042 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45043 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45048 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45052 \begin_inset space ~
45056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45058 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45065 \begin_layout Description
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45071 \begin_inset space ~
45074 Output settings for the menu
45076 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45084 For a detailed description see section
45086 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45099 \begin_layout Description
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset space ~
45108 Options offers settings for the export format
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45121 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45125 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45134 settings are described in detail in section
45136 Math Output in XHTML
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45150 \begin_inset space ~
45154 \begin_inset space ~
45159 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45162 \begin_layout Description
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45169 Save transient properties
45171 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45172 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45173 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45177 \begin_layout Itemize
45178 the activation of change tracking
45181 \begin_layout Itemize
45182 the output of tracked changes
45185 \begin_layout Itemize
45186 the recording of the document directory path.
45189 \begin_layout Standard
45190 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45191 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45195 \begin_layout Section
45203 \begin_layout Standard
45204 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45206 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45208 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45210 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45214 \begin_layout Standard
45215 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45216 -syntax is given in section
45217 \begin_inset space ~
45221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45223 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45230 \begin_layout Chapter
45236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45238 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45243 \begin_inset Index idx
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45255 \begin_layout Standard
45256 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45258 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45262 It has the following submenus.
45265 \begin_layout Section
45269 \begin_layout Subsection
45273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45274 User Interface File
45275 \begin_inset Index idx
45278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45279 Customization ! of toolbars
45285 \begin_inset Index idx
45288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45289 Customization ! of menus
45297 \begin_layout Standard
45298 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45299 interface (ui) file.
45300 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45308 \begin_layout Description
45313 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45316 \begin_layout Description
45323 the menu entries in popup context menus
45326 \begin_layout Description
45331 specifies the toolbar buttons
45334 \begin_layout Standard
45335 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45336 and edit the entries.
45339 \begin_layout Standard
45340 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45352 entries must be finished with an explicit
45377 and in the case of the
45378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45390 The syntax for the entries is:
45393 \begin_layout Standard
45394 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45423 \begin_layout Standard
45425 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45428 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45429 -functions are listed in the menu
45431 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45433 \begin_inset space ~
45441 \begin_layout Standard
45442 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45448 \begin_layout Standard
45449 For example, assuming you use the menu
45451 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45454 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45458 \begin_layout Standard
45459 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45483 \begin_layout Standard
45485 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45500 to have the sixth bookmark.
45503 \begin_layout Standard
45507 \begin_inset space ~
45512 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45513 's toolbar buttons.
45514 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45515 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45518 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45530 \begin_layout Standard
45533 Enable tool tips in main work area
45535 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45539 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45543 \begin_layout Standard
45548 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45549 should display in the menu
45551 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45553 \begin_inset space ~
45561 \begin_layout Subsection
45565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45569 \begin_layout Standard
45572 Restore window layouts and geometries
45575 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45576 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45580 \begin_layout Standard
45583 Restore cursor positions
45585 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45589 \begin_layout Standard
45592 Load opened files from last session
45594 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45598 \begin_layout Standard
45601 Clear all session information
45603 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45604 sessions (cursor positions, names
45605 of last opened documents, etc.).
45608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45612 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45617 \begin_inset Index idx
45620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45629 \begin_layout Standard
45632 Backup original documents when saving
45634 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45635 it was saved the last time.
45636 It is stored in the
45639 \begin_inset space ~
45645 \begin_inset space ~
45649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45651 reference "sec:Paths"
45655 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45658 \begin_inset space ~
45664 The backup file has the file extension
45665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45679 \begin_layout Standard
45682 Backup documents, every
45684 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45687 \begin_layout Standard
45690 Save documents compressed by default
45692 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45693 \begin_inset space ~
45697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45699 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45704 This applies to newly created documents only.
45705 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45709 Windows & work area
45712 \begin_layout Standard
45715 Open documents in tabs
45717 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45721 \begin_layout Standard
45726 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45733 \begin_inset space ~
45737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45739 reference "sec:Paths"
45743 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45750 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45751 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45752 of \SpecialChar LyX
45754 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45755 instance is created for each file.
45758 \begin_layout Standard
45761 Single close-tab button
45763 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45773 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45774 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45775 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45779 \begin_layout Standard
45780 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45788 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45789 before the change takes effect.
45797 \begin_layout Standard
45802 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45804 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45806 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45810 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45811 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45812 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45815 \begin_layout Subsection
45817 \begin_inset Index idx
45820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45829 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45836 \begin_layout Standard
45837 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45841 \begin_layout Standard
45842 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45850 This section only deals with the fonts
45854 the \SpecialChar LyX
45856 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45860 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45871 \begin_layout Standard
45872 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45889 (depends on the system) as its
45892 \begin_inset space ~
45908 \begin_layout Standard
45909 You can change the font size with the
45916 \begin_layout Standard
45921 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45926 points have the size of 1
45927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45931 \begin_inset space ~
45935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45937 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45942 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45947 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45948 \begin_inset space ~
45952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45954 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45964 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45966 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45967 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45968 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45969 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45970 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45972 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45973 \begin_inset space ~
45979 \begin_layout Subsection
45981 \begin_inset Index idx
45984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45985 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
45992 \begin_inset Index idx
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46004 \begin_layout Standard
46005 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46006 by choosing an item in the
46007 list and selecting the
46014 \begin_layout Standard
46015 By checking the option
46019 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46022 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46023 \begin_inset space ~
46027 \begin_inset space ~
46032 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46035 \begin_layout Subsection
46037 \begin_inset Index idx
46040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 \begin_layout Standard
46050 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46054 \begin_layout Standard
46059 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46060 This feature is described in section
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46067 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46074 \begin_layout Standard
46075 Checking the option
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46086 \begin_inset space ~
46091 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46094 \begin_layout Section
46096 \begin_inset Index idx
46099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46108 \begin_layout Subsection
46112 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46116 \begin_layout Standard
46119 Cursor follows scrollbar
46121 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46125 \begin_layout Standard
46126 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46127 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46128 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46131 \begin_layout Standard
46134 Scroll below end of document
46136 is self-explanatory.
46139 \begin_layout Standard
46140 In \SpecialChar LyX
46141 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46148 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46150 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46151 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46154 \begin_layout Standard
46157 Sort environments alphabetically
46159 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46162 \begin_layout Standard
46165 Group environments by their category
46167 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46170 \begin_layout Standard
46175 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46190 \begin_layout Standard
46191 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46196 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46197 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46201 \begin_layout Subsection
46203 \begin_inset Index idx
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 \begin_inset Index idx
46216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46217 Settings ! Shortcuts
46225 \begin_layout Standard
46230 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46232 Several binding files are available, among them:
46235 \begin_layout Description
46236 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46239 \begin_layout Description
46240 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46252 \begin_layout Description
46253 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46264 \begin_layout Standard
46265 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46270 , and binding files for special languages.
46271 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46276 \begin_inset space \space{}
46280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46288 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46289 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46290 will try to use the appropriate binding
46294 \begin_layout Standard
46295 Some binding files, like
46299 , only have a limited scope.
46300 When looking at the end of the file
46304 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46307 \begin_layout Standard
46311 \begin_inset space ~
46315 \begin_inset space ~
46320 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46321 in the selected key binding file.
46324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46328 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46333 \begin_inset Index idx
46336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 Key Bindings ! Editing
46345 \begin_layout Standard
46346 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46347 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46348 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46349 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46352 Show key-bindings containing
46355 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46356 Insert there for example as keyword
46357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46364 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46365 functions that contain
46366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46374 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46375 All \SpecialChar LyX
46376 functions are also listed in the file
46381 that you will find in the
46388 \begin_layout Standard
46389 For example, to add the shortcut
46397 , select the function and press the
46402 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46403 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46406 \begin_layout Standard
46407 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46408 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46410 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46411 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46413 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46418 \begin_layout Standard
46419 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46422 \begin_layout Standard
46423 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46425 The syntax of the entries is:
46428 \begin_layout Standard
46434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46453 \begin_layout Subsection
46455 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46457 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46462 \begin_inset Index idx
46465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46472 \begin_inset Index idx
46475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46476 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46484 \begin_layout Standard
46485 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46486 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46487 provides keyboard maps.
46488 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46489 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46492 \begin_inset space ~
46496 \begin_inset space ~
46501 and select the keyboard map file named
46508 \begin_layout Standard
46517 keyboard map and, if you use the
46521 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46524 arg "keymap-primary"
46530 arg "keymap-secondary"
46533 respectively or toggle between them with
46536 arg "keymap-toggle"
46542 \begin_layout Standard
46543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46551 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46560 \begin_layout Standard
46561 You can also specify the mouse
46563 Wheel scrolling speed
46566 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46570 Middle mouse button pasting
46572 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46573 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46576 \begin_layout Standard
46584 \begin_inset space ~
46588 \begin_inset space ~
46593 you can select a key for zooming.
46594 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46597 \begin_layout Subsection
46601 \begin_layout Standard
46602 Input completion is described in section
46603 \begin_inset space ~
46607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46609 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46616 \begin_layout Section
46618 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46625 \begin_inset Index idx
46628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46635 \begin_inset Index idx
46638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46647 \begin_layout Standard
46648 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46649 are normally determined during
46651 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46654 \begin_layout Description
46656 \begin_inset space ~
46659 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46660 's working directory.
46661 It is the default when you
46672 \begin_inset space ~
46680 \begin_layout Description
46682 \begin_inset space ~
46685 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46687 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46689 \begin_inset space ~
46693 \begin_inset space ~
46701 \begin_layout Description
46703 \begin_inset space ~
46706 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46712 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46716 \begin_inset Newline newline
46720 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46732 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46733 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46741 \begin_layout Description
46743 \begin_inset space ~
46747 \begin_inset Index idx
46750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46756 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46757 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46758 \begin_inset space ~
46762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46764 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46772 will be used to save the backups.
46773 \begin_inset Newline newline
46776 Backup files have the ending
46777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46787 \begin_layout Description
46789 \begin_inset space ~
46792 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46793 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46795 \begin_inset Newline newline
46802 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46808 You can edit this file with the program
46817 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46818 in its preferences under
46821 \begin_inset space ~
46827 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46832 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46834 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46835 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46841 and \SpecialChar LyX
46842 need to be running the same time.
46843 \begin_inset Newline newline
46846 The pipe is also used for the
46850 feature, see section
46851 \begin_inset space ~
46855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46857 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46862 \begin_inset Newline newline
46865 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46866 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46867 \begin_inset Newline newline
46883 \begin_layout Description
46885 \begin_inset space ~
46888 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46891 \begin_layout Description
46893 \begin_inset space ~
46896 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46897 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46898 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46901 \begin_layout Description
46903 \begin_inset space ~
46906 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46912 You only need to specify it if you are using
46916 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46918 For \SpecialChar LyX
46923 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46927 \begin_layout Description
46929 \begin_inset space ~
46932 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46933 When \SpecialChar LyX
46934 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46935 to find it on the system.
46936 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46938 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
46940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46947 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
46948 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
46951 \begin_layout Description
46953 \begin_inset space ~
46956 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
46957 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
46958 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
46959 code or in the document
46961 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
46963 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
46964 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
46965 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
46966 scanned for the input files.
46967 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
46968 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46970 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
46971 compilation may fail for some documents.
46974 \begin_layout Section
46978 \begin_layout Standard
46979 Here you can insert your
46988 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
46990 \begin_inset space ~
46994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46996 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47000 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47003 \begin_layout Section
47005 \begin_inset Index idx
47008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47009 Language ! Settings
47015 \begin_inset Index idx
47018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47019 Settings ! Language
47027 \begin_layout Subsection
47029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47031 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47038 \begin_layout Description
47040 \begin_inset space ~
47044 \begin_inset space ~
47047 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47049 You can find its actual translation status here:
47050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47052 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47060 \begin_layout Description
47062 \begin_inset space ~
47065 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47066 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47067 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47068 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47085 The most widespread language package is
47090 \begin_inset Index idx
47093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47100 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47102 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47103 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47104 come with the alternative
47110 \begin_inset Index idx
47113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47115 -packages ! polyglossia
47120 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47121 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47127 The available selections are described in section
47128 \begin_inset space ~
47132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47134 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47141 \begin_layout Description
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47146 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47147 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47148 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47149 An example is the start command
47155 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47157 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47161 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47177 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47182 \begin_layout Description
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47192 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47193 command toggles the package on and off.
47196 \begin_layout Description
47198 \begin_inset space ~
47202 \begin_inset space ~
47205 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47209 \begin_layout Description
47211 \begin_inset space ~
47215 \begin_inset space ~
47218 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47222 \begin_layout Description
47224 \begin_inset space ~
47228 \begin_inset space ~
47231 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47232 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47233 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47235 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47242 \begin_layout Description
47244 \begin_inset space ~
47247 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47249 When this option is not set, the
47252 \begin_inset space ~
47257 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47259 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47262 \begin_inset space ~
47270 \begin_layout Description
47272 \begin_inset space ~
47278 \begin_inset space ~
47284 When it is not set, the
47287 \begin_inset space ~
47292 is set to the end of the document.
47295 \begin_layout Description
47297 \begin_inset space ~
47301 \begin_inset space ~
47304 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47305 language will be underlined in blue.
47308 \begin_layout Description
47310 \begin_inset space ~
47314 \begin_inset space ~
47317 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47318 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47321 \begin_layout Description
47323 \begin_inset space ~
47326 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47327 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47328 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47329 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47332 \begin_layout Subsection
47336 \begin_layout Standard
47337 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47338 \begin_inset space ~
47342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47344 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47351 \begin_layout Section
47355 \begin_layout Subsection
47357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47359 name "subsec:General-output"
47366 \begin_layout Description
47368 \begin_inset space ~
47371 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47373 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47375 \begin_inset space ~
47381 For a detailed description see section
47383 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47388 \begin_inset space ~
47396 \begin_layout Description
47398 \begin_inset space ~
47401 Options Options for the program
47405 that is used for the export format
47410 \begin_inset space ~
47414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47416 reference "subsec:Export"
47421 Possible options are listed in the
47426 \begin_inset Newline newline
47430 \begin_inset Flex URL
47433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47435 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47445 \begin_layout Description
47447 \begin_inset space ~
47451 \begin_inset space ~
47454 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47457 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47458 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47460 \begin_inset space ~
47466 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47469 \begin_layout Description
47471 \begin_inset space ~
47475 \begin_inset Index idx
47478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47485 \begin_inset Index idx
47488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47489 Settings ! Date format
47494 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47495 \begin_inset Newline newline
47499 \begin_inset Flex URL
47502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47504 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47510 \begin_inset Newline newline
47513 For example the format
47514 \begin_inset Newline newline
47518 \begin_inset Newline newline
47521 prints the date as day/month/year.
47524 \begin_layout Description
47526 \begin_inset space ~
47530 \begin_inset space ~
47533 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47534 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47537 \begin_layout Subsection
47543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47545 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47550 \begin_inset Index idx
47553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47554 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47563 \begin_layout Description
47565 \begin_inset space ~
47573 \begin_inset space ~
47577 \begin_inset space ~
47580 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47585 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47606 are used for Cyrillic.
47607 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47620 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47622 sets up in the background.
47623 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47626 \begin_layout Description
47628 \begin_inset space ~
47632 \begin_inset space ~
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47643 options They only have an effect when the program
47647 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47650 \begin_layout Standard
47651 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47652 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47653 manuals of the applications.
47656 \begin_layout Description
47658 \begin_inset space ~
47661 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47662 \begin_inset space ~
47666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47668 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47675 \begin_layout Description
47677 \begin_inset space ~
47680 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47681 \begin_inset space ~
47685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47687 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47694 \begin_layout Description
47696 \begin_inset space ~
47699 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47706 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47713 \begin_layout Description
47719 \begin_inset space ~
47722 command Command for the program
47724 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47727 that is described in the section
47729 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47734 Additional Features
47739 \begin_layout Standard
47740 There are additionally the following options:
47743 \begin_layout Description
47745 \begin_inset space ~
47749 \begin_inset space ~
47753 \begin_inset space ~
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47765 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47783 to separate folders.
47784 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47786 \begin_inset Index idx
47789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47796 \begin_inset Index idx
47799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47808 \begin_layout Description
47810 \begin_inset space ~
47814 \begin_inset space ~
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47822 \begin_inset space ~
47826 \begin_inset space ~
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47833 changes Removes all manually set
47839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47840 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47842 \begin_inset space ~
47847 dialog when changing the document class.
47850 \begin_layout Section
47852 \begin_inset space ~
47856 \begin_inset Index idx
47859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47868 \begin_layout Subsection
47870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47872 name "subsec:Converters"
47877 \begin_inset Index idx
47880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47889 \begin_layout Standard
47890 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47891 from one format to another.
47892 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47893 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47900 \begin_inset space ~
47905 field and press the
47910 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47914 \begin_inset space ~
47919 drop-down list, modify the
47923 field and press the
47930 \begin_layout Standard
47933 Converter File Cache
47939 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
47941 Maximum Age (in days
47944 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
47945 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
47948 \begin_layout Standard
47949 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
47950 definition, is described in the section
47961 \begin_layout Subsection
47963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47965 name "sec:File-Formats"
47970 \begin_inset Index idx
47973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47980 \begin_inset Index idx
47983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47992 \begin_layout Standard
47993 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48003 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48006 \begin_layout Standard
48007 You can also define the
48009 Default output format
48011 that is used when you use
48013 View, Update, View Master Document
48017 Update Master Document
48023 menu or the toolbar.
48026 \begin_layout Standard
48027 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48038 \begin_layout Standard
48039 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48041 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48042 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48043 This is done by specifying a
48048 More about this is described in the section
48059 \begin_layout Chapter
48060 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48062 \begin_inset Index idx
48065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48074 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48081 \begin_layout Standard
48083 \begin_inset space ~
48087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48089 reference "tab:Units"
48093 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48094 and used in this documentation.
48097 \begin_layout Standard
48098 \begin_inset Float table
48104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48105 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48123 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48131 \begin_inset Tabular
48132 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48133 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48134 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48310 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48342 scaled point (65536
48343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48380 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48421 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48458 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48494 % of original image width
48499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48810 \begin_layout Chapter
48812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48814 name "chap:Credits"
48821 \begin_layout Standard
48822 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48823 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48826 \begin_layout Itemize
48829 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48832 \begin_layout Itemize
48838 \begin_layout Itemize
48844 \begin_layout Itemize
48850 \begin_layout Itemize
48856 \begin_layout Itemize
48862 \begin_layout Itemize
48868 \begin_layout Itemize
48874 \begin_layout Itemize
48877 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48880 \begin_layout Itemize
48886 \begin_layout Itemize
48892 \begin_layout Itemize
48898 \begin_layout Itemize
48904 \begin_layout Itemize
48910 \begin_layout Itemize
48916 \begin_layout Itemize
48922 \begin_layout Itemize
48928 \begin_layout Itemize
48929 The \SpecialChar LyX
48931 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48941 \begin_layout Standard
48942 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
48945 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
48952 \begin_layout Bibliography
48953 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48954 LatexCommand bibitem
48961 The \SpecialChar LyX
48963 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48966 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
48972 \begin_inset Newline newline
48976 \begin_inset Flex URL
48979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48981 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
48989 \begin_layout Bibliography
48990 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
48991 LatexCommand bibitem
48992 key "latexcompanion"
48997 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
48999 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49000 Companion Second Edition.
49003 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49006 \begin_layout Bibliography
49007 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49008 LatexCommand bibitem
49014 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49017 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49021 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49024 \begin_layout Bibliography
49025 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49026 LatexCommand bibitem
49035 : A Document Preparation System.
49038 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49041 \begin_layout Bibliography
49042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49043 LatexCommand bibitem
49053 The \SpecialChar TeX
49057 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49060 \begin_layout Bibliography
49061 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49062 LatexCommand bibitem
49068 The \SpecialChar TeX
49070 \begin_inset Newline newline
49074 \begin_inset Flex URL
49077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49079 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49087 \begin_layout Bibliography
49088 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49089 LatexCommand bibitem
49095 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49097 \begin_inset Newline newline
49101 \begin_inset Flex URL
49104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49106 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49114 \begin_layout Bibliography
49115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49116 LatexCommand bibitem
49123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49125 name "Documentation"
49126 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49133 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49137 \begin_inset Newline newline
49141 \begin_inset Flex URL
49144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49146 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49154 \begin_layout Bibliography
49155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49156 LatexCommand bibitem
49163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49165 name "Documentation"
49166 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49171 how to use the program
49173 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49177 \begin_inset Newline newline
49181 \begin_inset Flex URL
49184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49186 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49194 \begin_layout Bibliography
49195 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49196 LatexCommand bibitem
49203 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49206 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49211 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49217 \begin_inset Index idx
49220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49222 -packages ! biblatex
49228 \begin_inset Newline newline
49232 \begin_inset Flex URL
49235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49237 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49245 \begin_layout Bibliography
49246 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49247 LatexCommand bibitem
49254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49256 name "Documentation"
49257 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49267 \begin_inset Newline newline
49271 \begin_inset Flex URL
49274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49276 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49284 \begin_layout Bibliography
49285 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49286 LatexCommand bibitem
49287 key "makeindex-man"
49293 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49296 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49306 \begin_inset Newline newline
49310 \begin_inset Flex URL
49313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49315 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49323 \begin_layout Bibliography
49324 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49325 LatexCommand bibitem
49332 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49334 name "Documentation"
49335 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49345 \begin_inset Newline newline
49349 \begin_inset Flex URL
49352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49354 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49362 \begin_layout Bibliography
49363 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49364 LatexCommand bibitem
49371 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49373 name "Documentation"
49374 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49379 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49381 \begin_inset Newline newline
49385 \begin_inset Flex URL
49388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49390 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49398 \begin_layout Bibliography
49399 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49400 LatexCommand bibitem
49407 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49409 name "Documentation"
49410 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49415 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49421 \begin_inset Index idx
49424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49426 -packages ! caption
49432 \begin_inset Newline newline
49436 \begin_inset Flex URL
49439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49441 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49449 \begin_layout Bibliography
49450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49451 LatexCommand bibitem
49458 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49460 name "Documentation"
49461 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49466 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49472 \begin_inset Index idx
49475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49477 -packages ! enumitem
49483 \begin_inset Newline newline
49487 \begin_inset Flex URL
49490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49492 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49500 \begin_layout Bibliography
49501 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49502 LatexCommand bibitem
49509 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49511 name "Documentation"
49512 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49517 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49523 \begin_inset Index idx
49526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49528 -packages ! fancyhdr
49534 \begin_inset Newline newline
49538 \begin_inset Flex URL
49541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49543 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49551 \begin_layout Bibliography
49552 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49553 LatexCommand bibitem
49560 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49562 name "Documentation"
49563 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49568 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49574 \begin_inset Index idx
49577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49579 -packages ! hyperref
49585 \begin_inset Newline newline
49589 \begin_inset Flex URL
49592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49594 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49602 \begin_layout Bibliography
49603 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49604 LatexCommand bibitem
49611 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49613 name "Documentation"
49614 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49619 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49625 \begin_inset Index idx
49628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49630 -packages ! nomencl
49636 \begin_inset Newline newline
49640 \begin_inset Flex URL
49643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49645 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49653 \begin_layout Bibliography
49654 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49655 LatexCommand bibitem
49662 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49664 name "Documentation"
49665 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49670 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49676 \begin_inset Index idx
49679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49681 -packages ! prettyref
49687 \begin_inset Newline newline
49691 \begin_inset Flex URL
49694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49696 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49704 \begin_layout Bibliography
49705 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49706 LatexCommand bibitem
49713 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49715 name "Documentation"
49716 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49721 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49727 \begin_inset Index idx
49730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49732 -packages ! refstyle
49738 \begin_inset Newline newline
49742 \begin_inset Flex URL
49745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49747 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49755 \begin_layout Bibliography
49756 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49757 LatexCommand bibitem
49764 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49767 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49772 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49774 \begin_inset Newline newline
49778 \begin_inset Flex URL
49781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49783 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49791 \begin_layout Bibliography
49792 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49793 LatexCommand bibitem
49800 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49803 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49808 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49810 \begin_inset Newline newline
49814 \begin_inset Flex URL
49817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49819 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49827 \begin_layout Bibliography
49828 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49829 LatexCommand bibitem
49836 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49839 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49844 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49845 for Cyrillic languages:
49846 \begin_inset Newline newline
49850 \begin_inset Flex URL
49853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49855 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49863 \begin_layout Bibliography
49864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49865 LatexCommand bibitem
49872 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49875 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49880 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49882 \begin_inset Newline newline
49886 \begin_inset Flex URL
49889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49891 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
49899 \begin_layout Bibliography
49900 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49901 LatexCommand bibitem
49908 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49911 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
49916 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49918 \begin_inset Newline newline
49922 \begin_inset Flex URL
49925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49927 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
49935 \begin_layout Bibliography
49936 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49937 LatexCommand bibitem
49944 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49947 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
49952 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49954 \begin_inset Newline newline
49958 \begin_inset Flex URL
49961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49963 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
49971 \begin_layout Bibliography
49972 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49973 LatexCommand bibitem
49980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49983 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
49988 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49990 \begin_inset Newline newline
49994 \begin_inset Flex URL
49997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49999 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50007 \begin_layout Bibliography
50008 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50009 LatexCommand bibitem
50016 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50019 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50024 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50026 \begin_inset Newline newline
50030 \begin_inset Flex URL
50033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50035 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50043 \begin_layout Bibliography
50044 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50045 LatexCommand bibitem
50052 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50055 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50060 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50062 \begin_inset Newline newline
50066 \begin_inset Flex URL
50069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50071 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50079 \begin_layout Bibliography
50080 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50081 LatexCommand bibitem
50088 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50091 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50096 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50098 \begin_inset Newline newline
50102 \begin_inset Flex URL
50105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50107 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50115 \begin_layout Bibliography
50116 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50117 LatexCommand bibitem
50124 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50127 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50132 about new features in
50138 \begin_inset Newline newline
50142 \begin_inset Flex URL
50145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50147 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50155 \begin_layout Standard
50156 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50190 \begin_inset Note Note
50193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50200 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50201 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50202 bibliography is the second one:
50210 \begin_layout Standard
50211 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50212 LatexCommand bibtex
50213 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50214 options "biblio/alphadin"
50221 \begin_layout Standard
50222 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50226 \begin_layout Standard
50227 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50228 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50234 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50235 LatexCommand printindex